8-Port Multi-Gigabit Smart Managed Pro Switch with Two 10G Ports
Contents
1 Get Started
2 Configure System Information
3 Configure Switching
4 Configure Routing
5 Configure Quality of Service
- Manage Class of Service
- Manage Differentiated Services
6 Manage Device Security
7 Monitor the System
8 Maintain the Switch and Perform Troubleshooting
A Configuration Examples
B Hardware Specifications and Default Settings
- Hardware Specifications
- Switch Default Settings

NETGEAR MS510TXPP User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for MS510TXPP by NETGEAR which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

NETGEAR MS510TXPP Manual

NETGEAR NETGEAR Manual

NETGEAR AGM731F Manual

NETGEAR ProSafe GS724TR Manual

NETGEAR GS608-300PES Manual

NETGEAR, Inc.

350 East Plumeria Drive

San Jose, CA 95134, USA

July 2019

202-11762-04

User Manual

8-Port Multi-Gigabit Smart Managed

Pro

Switch with Two 10G Ports

MS510TX and MS510TXPP

User Manual

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

User Manual2

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

User Manual3

Support

Thank you for purchasing this NETGEAR product. You can visit www.netgear.com/support to register your product,

get help, access the latest downloads and user manuals, and join our community. We recommend that you use

only official NETGEAR support resources.

Conformity

For the current EU Declaration of Conformity, visit http://kb.netgear.com/app/answers/detail/a_id/11621.

Compliance

For regulatory compliance information, visit http://www.netgear.com/about/regulatory.

See the regulatory compliance document before connecting the power supply.

Do not use this device outdoors. If you connect cables or devices that are outdoors to this device, see

http://kb.netgear.com/000057103 for safety and warranty information.

Trademarks

trademarks are used for reference purposes only.

Revision History

Publication Part Number Publish Date Comments

202-11762-03 June 2018 Updated Configure VLAN Settings.

202-11762-02 September 2017 Made minor changes and corrections.

202-11762-01 September 2017 First publication.

Contents

Chapter 1 Get Started

Switch Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Available Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Switch Management Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Web Browser Requirements and Supported Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

User-Defined Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Interface Naming Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Access the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Access the Switch On-Network With a DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Access the Switch On-Network Without a DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Access the Switch Off-Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

How to Configure Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Local Browser Interface Device View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 2 Configure System Information

View and Configure the Switch Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

View or Define System Information and View Software Versions . . . . .26

View the System CPU Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

View USB Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Configure the IPv4 Address for the Network Interface and

Management VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

View the IPv6 Network Neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Configure the Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Configure DNS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Configure Green Ethernet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Use the Device View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Configure Power over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

PoE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Device Class Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Power Allocation and Power Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Configure the Global PoE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Configure the SNMPv1/v2 Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

View the Supported MIBs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

User Manual5

Configure SNMPv3 Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Configure LLDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Configure LLDP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Configure LLDP Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

LLDP-MED Network Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

LLDP-MED Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Local Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Neighbors Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Configure DHCP Snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Configure the Global DHCP Snooping Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Enable DHCP for All Interfaces in a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Configure DHCP Snooping Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Configure Static DHCP Bindings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Configure the DHCP Snooping Persistent Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Set Up PoE Timer Schedules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Create a PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Specify the Settings for a PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Add a Periodic Schedule for a PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Delete a Periodic Schedule for a PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Delete a PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Chapter 3 Configure Switching

Configure Port Settings and Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Configure IEEE 802.3x Global Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Configure the Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Configure Link Aggregation Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Configure LAG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Configure LAG Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Set the LACP System Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Set the LACP Port Priority Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Configure VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Configure VLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Configure VLAN Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

View VLAN Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Configure Port PVID Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Configure MAC-Based VLAN Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Manually Add Members to or Remove Them From a MAC-Based

VLAN Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Manually Add Members to or Remove Them From a

Protocol-Based VLAN Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Configure GARP Switch Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Configure GARP Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Configure a Voice VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Configure the Global Voice VLAN Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Configure Membership for the Voice VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Manage the OUI Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Configure Auto-VoIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

User Manual6

Configure Spanning Tree Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Configure STP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Configure CST Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Configure CST Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

View the CST Port Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

View Rapid STP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Manage MST Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Configure MST Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

View STP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Configure Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

View the MFDB Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

View the MFDB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Configure Auto-Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

IGMP Snooping Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Configure the Global IGMP Snooping Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

View the IGMP Snooping Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Modify IGMP Snooping Settings for a VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Disable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN and Remove It From the Table. 139

IGMP Snooping Querier Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Display the IGMP Snooping Querier for VLAN Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

MLD Snooping Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Configure the Global MLD Snooping Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Configure MLD Snooping for a VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Configure a Multicast Router Interface on a VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Configure MLD Snooping Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Configure a Multicast Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Remove a Multicast Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Configure Multicast Group Membership. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Configure the Multicast Forward All Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

View, Search, and Manage the MAC Address Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

View and Search the MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Change the Aging-Out Period of Dynamic MAC Addresses . . . . . . . 155

Add a Static MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Remove a Static MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Chapter 4 Configure Routing

IP Routing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Configure IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

Configure the Routing Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

View the IP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Configure VLAN Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

VLAN Routing Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

User Manual7

Manage IPv4 Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Configure Address Resolution Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

Display the ARP Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Add an Entry to the ARP Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Configure the Global Aging-Out Time for ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Remove an ARP Entry From the ARP Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Configure IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Configure IPv6 Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Add a Static IPv6 Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Change the Preference for a Static IPv6 Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Remove a Static IPv6 Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

View the IPv6 Route Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Configure IPv6 VLAN Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Add an IPv6 Global Address to an IPv6 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Change the Settings for an IPv6 Global Address on an IPv6 VLAN. . 182

Remove an IPv6 Global Address From an IPv6 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Add an IPv6 Prefix for Advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Change the Settings for an IPv6 Prefix for Advertisement on

an IPv6 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Remove an IPv6 Prefix From an IPv6 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

View IPv6 Statistics for an Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

View or Clear the IPv6 Neighbor Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Chapter 5 Configure Quality of Service

Manage Class of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

CoS Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Configure Global CoS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Configure the Global CoS Queue Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Configure the Global 802.1p to Queue Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

DSCP to Queue Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Manage Differentiated Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

DiffServ Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

View the Global DiffServ Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Specify DSCP Remark Values for Violate Action IP Packets. . . . . . . . . 199

Configure IPv4 DiffServ Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Configure an IPv6 DiffServ IPv6 Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Configure a DiffServ Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Configure DiffServ Service Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

View DiffServ Service Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Chapter 6 Manage Device Security

Management Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Change the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Reset the Password to the Factory Default Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Configure RADIUS Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Configure TACACS+ Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

User Manual8

Configure Authentication Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Configure Management Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Configure HTTP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Configure HTTPS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Manage the Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Configure Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Configure Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Configure Global 802.1X Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Manage Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

View the Port Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

View the Client Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Set Up Traffic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Configure Storm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Configure Port Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Configure Protected Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Configure Private VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Configure Access Control Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259

Use the ACL Wizard to Create a Simple ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Configure a Basic MAC ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Configure MAC ACL Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Configure MAC Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

View or Delete MAC ACL Bindings in the MAC Binding Table . . . . . 273

Configure an IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Configure Rules for a Basic IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Configure Rules for an Extended IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Configure an IPv6 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Configure IPv6 Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Configure IP ACL Interface Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

View or Delete IP ACL Bindings in the IP ACL Binding Table. . . . . . . 290

Chapter 7 Monitor the System

Monitor the Switch and the Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Switch Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

View Port Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

View Detailed Port Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

View EAP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Perform a Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Configure and View Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

Manage the Buffered Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Manage the Flash Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Manage the Server Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

View the Trap Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Configure Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310

View the System Resource Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

User Manual9

Chapter 8 Maintain the Switch and Perform Troubleshooting

Reboot the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Reset the Switch to Its Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314

Export a File From the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

Export a File to the TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

HTTP File Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Export a File From the Switch to a USB Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Download a File to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

Download a File to the Switch Using TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Download a File to the Switch Using HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Download a File From a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Manage Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323

Change the Image That Loads During the Boot Process . . . . . . . . . . 323

View the Dual Image Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

Ping an IPv4 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Ping an IPv6 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Send an IPv4 Traceroute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Send an IPv6 Traceroute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Generate Technical Support Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Enable Remote Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Appendix A Configuration Examples

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

VLAN Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Access Control Lists (ACLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

Sample MAC ACL Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Sample Standard IP ACL Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Differentiated Services (DiffServ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

DiffServ Traffic Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Creating Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

DiffServ Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

802.1X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342

802.1X Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

MSTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

MSTP Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

VLAN Routing Interface Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

Appendix B Hardware Specifications and Default Settings

Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Switch Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

1Get Started

This manual describes how you can configure and monitor the following NETGEAR switches by

using the local browser–based management interface:

• MS510TX. 8-Port Multi-Gigabit Smart Managed Pro Switch with two 10G Ports, Model

MS510TX

• MS510TXPP. 8-Port Multi-Gigabit Smart Managed Pro Switch with PoE+ and two 10G

Ports, Model MS510TXPP

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Switch Descriptions

•Available Publications

•Switch Management Methods

•Web Browser Requirements and Supported Browsers

•User-Defined Fields

•Interface Naming Conventions

•Access the Switch

•Register the Switch

•How to Configure Interface Settings

•Local Browser Interface Device View

In this manual, we refer to both switch models as the switch. Unless noted otherwise, all

information applies to both switch models.

For more information about the topics covered in this manual, visit the support website at

netgear.com/support.

Firmware updates with new features and bug fixes are automatically made available through the

Insight app and, if selected, pushed straight from the cloud to the device. If you are not using the

Insight app to manage your device, you can manually download and install the latest firmware by

visiting downloadcenter.netgear.com. If the features or behavior of your product does not

match what is described in this manual, you might need to update your firmware.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual11

Switch Descriptions

The switch provides four multispeed Gigabit Ethernet and four 1G Ethernet RJ-45 copper

ports with one dedicated 10G RJ-45 copper uplink port and one dedicated SFP+ fiber uplink

port that supports 10G and 1G. Two of the four multispeed ports support 5G, 2.5G, and 1G.

The other two multispeed ports support 2.5G and 1G. (The 10G RJ-45 copper uplink port also

supports 5G, 2.5G and 1G.)

The switch models differ in the following ways:

• Model MS510TXPP. This model supports Power over Ethernet plus (PoE+) on all four

multispeed ports and four 1G ports so that you can let the switch provide power to

PoE-capable devices such as WiFi access points, VoIP phones, and IP security cameras.

• Model MS510TXPP. This model can supply up to 30W PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at) to each port,

with a maximum PoE power budget of 180W across all active PoE+ ports.

Available Publications

The following guides and manual are available at downloadcenter.netgear.com:

•Installation Guide

•Hardware Installation Guide

•Smart Control Center User Manual

For general switch information, see the NETGEAR knowledge base articles at

netgear.com/support.

Switch Management Methods

If you prefer, you can use the switch as a plug-and-play device, so you do not need to set up

a custom configuration. Just connect power, connect to your network and to your other

devices, and you are done.

You can configure the switch and the network, including the ports, the management VLAN,

VLANs for traffic control, link aggregation for increased bandwidth, quality of service (QoS)

for prioritizing traffic, and network security.

You can configure and monitor the switch by using one of the following methods:

• Smart Control Center (SCC). Initial discovery of the switch on the network requires the

Smart Control Center (SCC) program, which runs on a Windows-based computer. You

can also download the SCC program from downloadcenter.netgear.com. If you do not

use a Windows-based computer, get the IP address of the switch from the DHCP server

in the network or use an IP scanner utility.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual12

After discovery, you can configure the switch using the local browser–based management

interface, or the SCC program for very basic setup. For more information, see Access the

Switch on page 14 and the SCC user manual, which you can download from

downloadcenter.netgear.com.

• Local browser–based management interface. This manual describes how to use the

local browser–based management interface, in this manual referred to as the local

browser interface, to manage and monitor the switch. The local browser interface lets you

configure basic and advanced features. For more information, see Access the Switch on

page 14.

• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). You can manage through switch

through SNMP. For more information, see Configure SNMP on page 59.

Web Browser Requirements and

Supported Browsers

To access the switch by using a web browser, the browser must meet the following software

requirements:

•HTML version 4.0, or later

•HTTP version 1.1, or later

•Java Runtime Environment 1.6 or later

The following browsers were tested and support the local browser interface. Later browser

versions might function fine but were not tested. The following web browsers are supported:

•Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) versions 9–11

•Microsoft Edge 25

•Mozilla Firefox versions 53–54

•Chrome versions 58–59

•Safari on MAC OS: 10.1 (MAC OS Yosemite Version 10.10.5)

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual13

User-Defined Fields

User-defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters, unless otherwise noted on the

configuration web page. All characters can be used except for the ones stated in the

following table (unless specifically noted in a procedure for a feature).

Table 1. Invalid characters for user-defined fields

Invalid characters for user-defined fields

\ <

/ >

* |

Interface Naming Conventions

The switch supports physical and logical interfaces. Interfaces are identified by their type and

the interface number. The physical ports are Gigabit interfaces and are numbered on the

front panel. You configure the logical interfaces by using the local browser interface.

The following types of ports are supported:

•Ports g1-g4 are Gigabit ports.

•Ports mg5-mg6 are Multi-Gigabit Ethernet ports, each of which supports a maximum

speed of 2.5 Gbps.

•Ports mg7-mg8 are Multi-Gigabit Ethernet ports, each of which supports a maximum

speed of 5 Gbps.

•Port xmg9 is a Multi-Gigabit Ethernet port that supports a maximum speed of 10 Gbps.

•Port xg10 is a fiber port in which you can install an SFP+ module.

The following table describes the naming convention for all interfaces on the switch.

Table 2. Naming conventions for interfaces

Interface Description Examples

Physical The physical ports are numbered sequentially

starting from one.

g1, g2,

mg5,

xmg9

xg10

Link aggregation group (LAG) LAG interfaces are logical interfaces that are

used only for bridging functions.

LAG1, LAG2, LAG8

Routing VLAN interfaces An interface is used for routing functionality. VLAN 1, VLAN 2, VLAN 55

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual14

Access the Switch

For easiest access, we recommend that you connect the switch to a network with a router or

DHCP server that assigns IP addresses, power on the switch, and then use a computer that

is connected to the same network as the switch (see Access the Switch On-Network With a

DHCP Server on page 14). If your network does not include a DHCP server, you can assign

a static IP address (see Access the Switch On-Network Without a DHCP Server on

page 16).

It is also possible to configure the switch connected directly only to the computer that you are

using to configure it, and not connected to the network (off-network, see Access the Switch

Off-Network on page 18).

Use one of the following methods to determine or assign the IP address of the switch and

access the switch:

• Determine the DHCP-assigned IP address. DHCP is enabled on the switch by default.

If you connect the switch to a network with a DHCP server, the switch obtains its network

information automatically. You can use the Smart Control Center to discover the

automatically assigned network information. For more information, see Access the Switch

On-Network With a DHCP Server on page 14.

• Assign a static IP address through the Smart Control Center. If you connect the

switch to a network that does not include a DHCP server, or you prefer to assign static

addresses, you can use the Smart Control Center (SCC) to assign a static IP address,

subnet mask, and default gateway. For more information, see Access the Switch

On-Network Without a DHCP Server on page 16.

• Assign a static IP address from a directly-connected computer. If you do not use the

Smart Control Center to assign a static address, you can connect to the switch directly

from a computer in the 192.168.0.0/24 network and change the settings by using the local

browser interface on the switch. For more information, see Access the Switch

Off-Network on page 18.

Access the Switch On-Network With a DHCP Server

The DHCP client on the switch is enabled by default, allowing a DHCP server on the network

(or router that functions as a DHCP server) to assign an IP address to the switch.

When you connect the switch to your network, the DHCP server automatically assigns an IP

address to the switch. Use the Smart Control Center (SCC) to discover the IP address

automatically assigned to the switch.

The SCC program runs on a Windows-based computer which you can download from

downloadcenter.netgear.com. If you do not use a Windows-based computer, get the IP

address of the switch from the DHCP server in the network or use an IP scanner utility, which

are available free of charge on the Internet.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual15

Note: The computer that is running the SCC program must be on the same

network (that is, in the same broadcast domain) as the switch.

To determine the DHCP-assigned IP address of the switch and access the switch:

1. Connect the switch to a network that includes a DHCP server.

2. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

3. Install the Smart Control Center on your computer.

4. Start the Smart Control Center.

5. Click the Discover button.

The Smart Control Center finds your switch.

6. Write down the displayed IP address assigned by the DHCP server.

You need this address later to access the switch directly from a web browser (without

using the Smart Control Center).

7. Select the switch by clicking the row for the switch.

8. Click the Web Browser Access button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual16

The Smart Control Center launches a browser.

The login window opens.

9. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The Switch Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

Access the Switch On-Network Without a DHCP Server

You can use the Smart Control Center (SCC) to set up your switch in a network without a

DHCP server and assign a static IP address to the switch.

If you prefer, you can assign the switch a static IP address even if your network does include

a DHCP server.

The SCC program runs on a Windows-based computer which you can download from

downloadcenter.netgear.com. If you do not use a Windows-based computer, see Access

the Switch Off-Network on page 18.

To assign a static IP address to the switch on-network and access the switch:

1. Connect the switch to a network.

2. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

3. Install the Smart Control Center on your computer.

4. Start the Smart Control Center.

5. Click the Discover button.

The Smart Control Center finds your switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual17

6. Select the switch, and then click the Configure Device button.

The page expands to display additional fields at the bottom.

7. Select the Disabled radio button.

The DHCP client is disabled.

8. Enter the static switch IP address, gateway IP address, and subnet mask for the switch.

9. Enter the switch password to continue with the configuration change.

The default password is password. You must enter the password each time that you use

the Smart Control Center to update the switch settings.

Note: If you change the default password to a custom password (which we

recommend) using the local browser interface and need to use the

Smart Control Center again, you must enter the custom password for

configuration changes to be accepted.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual18

11. Click the Discover button.

The Smart Control Center finds your switch with its new IP address.

12. Select the switch by clicking the row for the switch.

13. Click the Web Browser Access button.

The Smart Control Center launches a browser.

The login window opens.

14. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The Switch Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

Access the Switch Off-Network

You can connect to the switch directly from a computer and change the settings by using the

local browser interface of the switch. The default IP address of the switch is 192.168.0.239.

The IP address of the computer that you use to access the switch must in the same subnet

as the default IP address of the switch, that is, it must be in the in the 192.168.0.0/24 subnet.

To assign a static IP address to the switch off-network from a directly-connected

computer:

1. Record your computer’s TCP/IP configuration settings, and then configure the computer

with a static IP address.

For example, configure 192.168.0.210 as the IP address and 255.255.255.0 as the

subnet mask.

Note: If you are unsure how to do this, visit

netgear.com/search-support.aspx and search for the following:

How to set a static IP address in Windows

Setting a static IP address on your network adapter in Mac OS

2. Plug the switch into a power outlet and then connect your computer to the switch using an

Ethernet cable.

You can connect the Ethernet cable to any Ethernet port on the switch.

3. Open a web browser, and enter http://192.168.0.239.

This is the default address of the switch.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The Switch Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual19

5. After you complete the configuration of the switch, reconfigure the computer that you used

for this process to its original TCP/IP settings.

You can now connect your switch to your network using an Ethernet cable.

To qualify for product updates and product warranty, we encourage you to register your

product. The first time you log in to the switch, you are given the option of registering with

NETGEAR. Registration confirms that your email alerts work, lowers technical support

resolution time, and ensures that your shipping address accuracy. We would also like to

incorporate your feedback into future product development. We never sell or rent your email

address and you can opt out of communications at any time.

When you log in to the switch, you are prompted to register with NETGEAR. However, at any

time you can visit the NETGEAR website for registration at

https://my.netgear.com/register/register.aspx.

How to Configure Interface Settings

For some features that allow you to configure interface settings, you can apply the same

settings simultaneously to any of the following:

•A single port

•Multiple ports

•All ports

•A single LAG

•Multiple LAGs

•All LAGs

•Multiple ports and LAGs

•All ports and LAGs

Many of the pages that allow you to configure or view interface settings include links to

display all ports, all LAGs, or all ports and LAGs on the page.

Use these links as follows:

•To display all ports, click the PORTS link.

•To display all LAGs, click the LAGS link.

•To display all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual20

The procedures in this section describe how to select the ports and LAGs to configure. The

procedures assume that you are already logged in to the switch. If you do not know how to

To configure a single port or LAG:

1. Click the All link to display the all ports and LAGs.

2. Do one of the following:

a. In the Go To Interface field, type the port number and click the Go button.

For example, type g4 for a port or type LAG2 for a LAG. For more information, see

Interface Naming Conventions on page 13.

The check box for the interface is selected, the row for the selected interface is

highlighted, and the interface number displays in the heading row.

b. Select the check box for the port or LAG.

The row for the selected interface is highlighted, and the interface number displays in

the heading row.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure multiple ports and LAGs:

1. Click the All link to display all ports and LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to each port and LAG to configure.

The row for each selected interface is highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure all ports and LAGs:

1. Click the All link to display all ports and LAGs.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check boxes for all ports and LAGs are selected and the rows for all ports and LAGs

are highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual21

Local Browser Interface Device View

The Device View displays the ports in the local browser interface displays the ports on the

switch. This graphic provides an alternate way to navigate to configuration and monitoring

options. The graphic also provides information about device ports, current configuration and

status, tables, and feature components.

To use the Device View:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The Switch Information page displays.

5. Select System > Device View.

The previous figure shows the Device View page for model MS510TX.

The system LEDs are located on the left side.

Depending upon the status of the port, the port color in Device View is either yellow,

green, or black (that is, off).

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual22

The following table describes the LEDs on the Device View page.

Table 3. LEDs on the Device View page

LED Description

Power LED The Power LED is a bicolor LED that serves as an indicator of power and

diagnostic status:

• Solid green. Power is supplied to the switch and the switch is

operating normally.

• Solid yellow. The switch is in the boot-up stage.

• Off. No power is supplied to the switch.

Fan LED The Fan LED indicates the following status:

• Off. Fan is operating normally.

• Solid yellow. A problem occurred with the fan.

PoE MAX LED

(Model MS510TXPP only)

The PoE MAX Power LED indicates the following PoE conditions at

switch (not port) level:

• Off. More than 7W of PoE power is available for another powered

device (PD).

• Solid yellow. Less than 7W of PoE power is available for another

PD.

• Blinking yellow. The PoE Max LED was activate in the previous two

minutes.

1G Ports 1–4, Left LEDs

Link, speed, and activity

The left LEDs for ports 1–4 (g1 to g4) indicate the following status:

• Off. No link is established.

• Solid green. A valid 1 Gbps link is established.

• Blinking green. The port is transmitting or receiving packets at

Gbps.

• Solid yellow. A valid 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps link is established.

• Blinking yellow.The port is transmitting or receiving packets at 10

Mbps or 100 Mbps.

1G Ports 1–4, Right LEDs

PoE status

(Model MS510TXPP only)

The right LEDs for ports 1–4 (g1 to g4) indicate the following status:

• Off. The port is not delivering PoE.

• Solid green. The port is delivering PoE.

• Solid yellow. A PoE fault occurred.

2.5G Ports 5 and 6, Left LEDs

Link, speed, and activity

The left LEDs for ports 5 and 6 (mg5 and mg6) indicate the following

status:

• Off. No link is established.

• Solid green. A valid 2.5 Gbps link is established.

• Blinking green. The port is transmitting or receiving packets at 2.5

Gbps.

• Solid yellow. A valid 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps link is established.

• Blinking yellow. The port is transmitting or receiving packets at 100

Mbps or 1000 Mbps.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual23

6. To see a menu that displays statistics and configuration options, right-click a port.

2.5G Ports 5 and 6, Right LEDs

PoE status

(Model MS510TXPP only)

The right LEDs for ports 5 and 6 (mg5 and mg6) indicate the following

status:

• Off. The port is not delivering PoE.

• Solid green. The port is delivering PoE.

• Solid yellow. A PoE fault occurred.

5G Ports 7 and 8, Left LEDs

Link, speed, and activity

The left LEDs for ports 7 and 8 (mg7 and mg8) indicate the following

status:

• Off. No link is established.

• Solid green. A valid 2.5 Gbps or 5 Gbps link is established.

• Blinking green. The port is transmitting or receiving packets at 2.5

Gbps or 5 Gbps.

• Solid yellow. A valid 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps link is established.

• Blinking yellow. The port is transmitting or receiving packets at 100

Mbps or 1000 Mbps.

5G Ports 7 and 8, Right LEDs

PoE status

(Model MS510TXPP only)

The right LEDs for ports 7 and 8 (mg7 and mg8) indicate the following

status:

• Off. The port is not delivering PoE.

• Solid green. The port is delivering PoE.

• Solid yellow. A PoE fault occurred.

10G Port 9, LED

Link, speed, and activity

The LED for port 9 (xmg9) indicates the following status:

• Off. No link is established.

• Solid green. A valid 10 Gbps link is established.

• Blinking green. The port is transmitting or receiving packets at

Gbps.

• Solid yellow. A valid 5 Gbps, 2.5 Gbps, 1000 Mbps, or 100 Mbps

link is established.

• Blinking yellow. The port is transmitting or receiving packets at

Gbps, 2.5 Gbps, 1000 Mbps, or 100 Mbps

SFP+ Port 10, LEDs

Link, speed, and activity

The LEDs for port 10 (xg10, the SFP+ port) indicate the following status:

• Off. No SFP+ module link is established on the fiber port.

• Left LED solid green. The fiber port established a valid 10 Gbps

link.

• Left LED blinking green. The fiber port is transmitting or receiving

packets at 10 Gbps.

• Right LED solid yellow. The fiber port established a valid 1 Gbps

link.

• Right LED blinking yellow. The fiber port is transmitting or receiving

packets at 1 Gbps

Table 3. LEDs on the Device View page (continued)

LED Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Get Started User Manual24

The previous figure shows the Device View page for model MS510TXPP.

7. To display the main menu that contains the same options as the navigation menu at the top

of the page, right-click the graphic without clicking a specific port.

The previous figure shows the Device View page for model MS510TXPP.

2Configure System Information

This chapter covers the following topics:

•View and Configure the Switch Management Settings

•Use the Device View

•Configure Power over Ethernet

•Configure SNMP

•Configure LLDP

•Configure DHCP Snooping

•Set Up PoE Timer Schedules

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual26

View and Configure the Switch

Management Settings

This section describes how to display the switch status and specify some basic switch

information, such as the management interface IP address, system clock settings, and DNS

information. From the System > Management menu, you can access pages that are

described in the following sections:

•View or Define System Information and View Software Versions on page 26

•View the System CPU Status on page 28

•View USB Device Information on page 29

•Configure the IPv4 Address for the Network Interface and Management VLAN on

page 30

•Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface on page 32

•View the IPv6 Network Neighbor on page 33

•Configure the Time Settings on page 34

•Configure DNS Settings on page 44

•Configure Green Ethernet Settings on page 47

View or Define System Information and View Software

Versions

When you log in, the System Information page displays. Use this page to configure and view

general device information such as system name, location, and contact, general system

temperature, temperatures of the fans, and boot and software versions.

To view or define system information and view software versions:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual27

5. Define the following fields:

• System Name. Enter the name to identify this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

• System Location. Enter the location of this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

• System Contact. Enter the contact person for this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

6. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the status information that the System Information page

displays.

Field Description

Serial Number The serial number of the switch.

System Object ID The base object ID for the switch’s enterprise MIB.

Date & Time The current date and time.

System Up Time The number of days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the last system

restart.

Base MAC Address Universally assigned network address.

IC Temp(C) Integrated circuit temperature in Celsius values.

Fan Status The status of fan operations.

Model Name The model name of the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual28

View the System CPU Status

Use the System CPU Status page to monitor the CPU, memory resources, and utilization

patterns across various intervals to assess the performance of the switch.

To configure and view the system CPU status and utilization:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > System CPU Status.

The CPU Memory Status page displays.

The page shows the total system memory and the available memory in MB.

6. Enable the switch to calculate the CPU utilization:

• CPU Utilization. Select the Disable or Enable radio button. By default, the Enable

radio button is selected.

• Refresh Rate. Select a radio button number to specify the number of seconds at

which the CPU utilization is computed. By default, the No radio button is selected.

The CPU Input Rate field shows the number of frames forwarded to the CPU per second.

The CPU utilization rate is displayed in a graph. The Y axis represents the CPU utilization

in percentage. The X axis represents the number of elapsed seconds and is correlated to

the selected refresh rate.

Boot Version The boot code version of the switch.

Software Version The software version of the switch.

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual29

View USB Device Information

Use the USB Device Information page to display the USB device status, memory statistics,

and directory details.

The limitations for the USB device supported on the switch are as follows:

•The USB disk must comply with the USB 2.0 standard.

•The USB disk must be file type FAT32. File type NTFS is not supported.

To display the USB device information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > USB Device Information.

The USB Memory Statistics page displays.

6. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the USB Memory Statistics information.

Table 4. USB Memory Statistics information

Field Description

Total Size The USB flash device storage size in bytes.

Bytes Used The size of memory used on the USB flash device.

Bytes Free The size of memory free on the USB flash device.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual30

The following table describes the USB Directory Details information.

Table 5. USB Directory Details information

Field Description

File Name The name of the file stored in the USB flash drive.

Type The type of file, which can be one of the following:

• Folder. A subfolder within the file.

• File. A file.

• Other. A path, which can be one of the following:

- Current path. The full path for the folder that is being displayed.

- Parent folder path. The path for the parent folder of the folder

that is being displayed. You can click the entry and open the

parent folder.

File Size The size, in bytes, of the file stored in the USB flash drive.

Modification Time The last modification time of the file stored in the USB flash drive.

Configure the IPv4 Address for the Network Interface and

Management VLAN

You can configure network information for the network interface, which is the logical interface

used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s ports. You also use

the IPv4 address of the network interface to connect to the switch through the local browser

interface. The configuration parameters that is associated with the switch’s network interface

do not affect the configuration of the ports through which traffic is switched.

To configure the IPv4 address for the network interface and the management VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > IP Configuration.

The IP Configuration page displays.

Click the folder name to view the contents of the subfolder.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual31

6. Select a radio button to determine how to configure the network information for the switch

management interface:

• Static IP Address. Specifies that the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway

must be manually configured. Enter this information in the fields below this radio

button.

• Dynamic IP Address (DHCP). Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address

through a DHCP server.

7. If you select the Static IP Address radio button, configure the following network information:

• IP Address. The IP address of the network interface. Each part of the IP address

must start with a number other than zero. For example, IP addresses 001.100.192.6

and 192.001.10.3 are not valid. The factory default IP address is 192.168.0.239.

• Subnet Mask. The IP subnet mask for the interface. The factory default subnet mask

is 255.255.255.0.

• Default Gateway. The default gateway for the IP interface. The factory default

gateway address is 192.168.0.254.

8. From the Management VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID for the management VLAN.

The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a

computer that is connected to a port in the same VLAN. If not specified, the active

management VLAN ID is 1 (default), which allows an IP connection to be established

through any port.

When the management VLAN is set to a different value, an IP connection can be made

only through a port that is part of the management VLAN. Also, the port VLAN ID (PVID)

of the port to be connected in that management VLAN must be the same as the

management VLAN ID.

Note: Make sure that the VLAN that must be the management VLAN exists.

Also make sure that the PVID of at least one port in the VLAN is the

same as the management VLAN ID. For information about creating

VLANs and configuring the PVID for a port, see Configure VLANs on

page 96.

The following requirements apply to the management VLAN:

•Only one management VLAN can be active at a time.

•When a new management VLAN is configured, connectivity through the existing

management VLAN is lost.

•The management station must be reconnected to the port in the new management

VLAN.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual32

Configure the IPv6 Address for the Network Interface

You can configure the IPv6 address for the network interface, which is the logical interface

used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front-panel ports.

You also use the IPv6 address of the network interface to connect to the switch through the

local browser interface. The configuration parameters that is associated with the switch’s

network interface do not affect the configuration of the ports through which traffic is switched.

To access the switch over an IPv6 network, you must initially configure the switch with IPv6

information (IPv6 prefix, prefix length, and default gateway). IPv6 can be configured using

any of the following options:

•IPv6 autoconfiguration

•DHCPv6

When in-band connectivity is established, IPv6 information can be changed using

SNMP-based management or web-based management.

To configure the IPv6 address for the network interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > IPv6 Network Configuration.

The IPv6 Network Global Configuration page displays.

6. Ensure that the Admin Mode Enable radio button is selected.

7. Select IPv6 Address Auto Configuration Mode Enable radio button to enable the network

interface to acquire an IPv6 address through IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) and

through the use of router advertisement messages.

When this mode is disabled, the network interface does not use the native IPv6 address

autoconfiguration features to acquire an IPv6 address.

8. In the Current Network Configuration Protocol field define the IPv6 network interface to

receive an IPv6 address from a DHCP server. The default value is None.

9. If the above field is set to DHCPv6 Protocol, the DHCPv6 Client DUID field (read only)

displays the DHCPv6 client DUID

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual33

10. In the IPv6 Gateway field, specify the default gateway for the IPv6 network interface.

The gateway address is in IPv6 global or link-local address format.

11. To configure one or more static IPv6 addresses for the management interface, do the

following:

a. In the IPv6 Prefix/Prefix Length field, specify the static IPv6 prefix and prefix to the

IPv6 network interface.

The address is in the global address format.

b. In the EUI64 menu, select True to enable the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI)

flag for IPv6 address, or select False to omit the EUI flag.

c. Click the Add button.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the IPv6 Network Neighbor

Use the IPv6 Network Neighbor page to view information about the IPv6 neighbors that the

switch discovers through the network interface by using the Neighbor Discovery Protocol

(NDP).

To view the IPv6 neighbor table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > IPv6 Network Neighbor.

The IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual34

The following table describes the information that the IPv6 Network Interface Neighbor Table

displays about each IPv6 neighbor that the switch discovered.

Table 6. IPv6 network interface neighbor table information

Field Description

IPv6 Address The IPv6 address of a neighbor switch visible to the network interface.

MAC Address The MAC address of a neighbor switch.

isRtr • True. The neighbor machine is a router.

• False. The neighbor machine is not a router.

Neighbor State The state of the neighboring switch:

• Reach. No more than ReachableTime milliseconds elapsed since the switch received

confirmation that the forward path to the neighbor was functioning properly. In the

Reach state, the device takes no special action when packets are sent.

• Stale. More than ReachableTime milliseconds elapsed since the switch received

confirmation that the forward path was functioning properly. In the Stale state, the

device takes no action until a packet is sent.

• Delay. More than ReachableTime milliseconds elapsed since the switch received

confirmation that the forward path was functioning properly. A packet was sent within

the last DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds. If no confirmation is received within

DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds of entering the Delay state, the device sends

a neighbor solicitation message and changes the state to Probe.

• Probe. The switch actively seeks confirmation by repeatedly sending neighbor

solicitation messages each RetransTimer milliseconds until a confirmation is

received.

Last Updated The last time that the neighbor was updated.

Configure the Time Settings

The switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). As its name suggests, it is a

less complicated version of Network Time Protocol, which is a system for synchronizing the

clocks of networked computer systems, primarily when data transfer is handled through the

Internet. You can also set the system time manually.

Configure the Time Setting Manually

Use the Time Configuration page to view and adjust date and time settings.

To manually configure the time setting:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual35

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Global Configuration.

The Time Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Clock Source Local radio button.

7. In the Date field, specify the current date in months, days, and years (DD-MMM-YYYY).

8. In the Time field, specify the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds (HH:MM:SS).

Note: If you do not enter a date and time, the switch calculates the date and

time using the CPU’s clock cycle.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an SNTP Server

SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond.

Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. The switch operates only as

an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems.

Time sources are established by strata. Strata define the accuracy of the reference clock.

The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. The device

receives time from Stratum 1 and above since it is itself a Stratum 2 device.

The following is an example of strata:

• Stratum 0. A real-time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system.

• Stratum 1. A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. Stratum 1

time servers provide primary network time standards.

• Stratum 2. The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path.

For example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, through NTP, from

a Stratum 1 server.

Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and server

type.

SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels:

•T1. Time that the original request was sent by the client.

•T2. Time that the original request was received by the server.

•T3. Time that the server sent a reply.

•T4. Time that the client received the server's reply.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual36

The device can poll unicast server types for the server time.

Polling for unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known.

SNTP servers that were configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for

synchronization information. T1 through T4 are used to determine server time. This is the

preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method. If this

method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the

device using the SNTP Server Configuration page.

The device retrieves synchronization information, either by actively requesting information or

at every poll interval.

You can view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network Time Protocol

SNTP servers.

Add an SNTP Server

To add an SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays. The page also displays the SNTP Server

Status section.

6. From the Server Type menu, select the type of SNTP address to enter in the Address field.

The address can be either an IP address (IPv4, IPv6) or a host name (DNS). The default

value is IPv4.

7. In the Address field, specify the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.

Unicast SNTP requests are sent to this address. If this address is a DNS host name, then

that host name is resolved into an IP address each time an SNTP request is sent to it.

8. If the UDP port on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent is not the standard

port (123), specify the port number in the Port field.

The valid range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 123.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual37

9. Click the Add button.

The SNTP server entry is added.

10. Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers.

You can configure up to eight SNTP servers.

The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers

configured on your switch. The following table describes the SNTP Server Global Status

information.

Table 7. SNTP Server Status information

Field Description

Address All the existing server addresses. If no server configuration exists, a message stating

that no SNTP server exists displays on the page.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the response from this server was used to update

the system clock.

Change the Settings for an Existing SNTP Server

To change the settings for an existing SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the configured server.

7. Specify new values in the available fields.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual38

Remove an SNTP Server

To remove an SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the configured server to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The entry is removed, and the device is updated.

Enable SNTP and Configure the Time Zone Offset

You must first configure an SNTP server (see Configure an SNTP Server on page 35) before

you can enable SNTP.

To enable SNTP settings and configure the time zone offset:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Global Configuration.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual39

The Time Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Clock Source SNTP radio button.

The Date and Time fields are disabled because the switch receives the date and time

from the network.

7. From the Time Zone Offset menu, select the number of hours that the time zone in which

the switch is located differs from the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

The time zone can affect the display of the current system time. The default value is UTC

0:00.

Note: When you use SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch’s clock,

the time data received from the server is based on the UTC 0:00, which

is the same as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the

time zone in which the switch is located.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

9. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

View SNTP Global Status

You can view global SNTP status information.

To view SNTP global status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Global Status.

The SNTP Global Status page displays.

6. Click the Refresh button to update the page with the latest information about the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual40

The following table displays the nonconfigurable SNTP Global Status information.

Table 8. SNTP Global Status information

Field Description

Version The SNTP version that the client supports.

Supported mode The SNTP modes that the client supports. Multiple modes can be supported by

a client.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP client last updated the system

clock.

Server IP Address The IP address of the server for the last received valid packet. If no message

was received from any server, an empty string is shown.

Address Type The address type of the SNTP server address for the last received valid

packet.

Server Stratum The claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.

Server mode The mode of the server for the last received valid packet.

Unicast Server Max Entries The maximum number of unicast server entries that can be configured on this

client.

Unicast Server Current Entries The number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this client.

Configure Daylight Saving Time Settings

Use the Daylight Saving Time Configuration page to configure settings for daylight saving

time, which is also known as summer time. Used in some countries around the world,

daylight saving time is the practice of temporarily advancing clocks during the summer

months. Typically clocks are adjusted forward one or more hours near the start of spring and

are adjusted backward in autumn.

To configure the daylight saving time settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Daylight Saving Configuration.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual41

6. Select a Daylight Saving (DST) radio button:

• Disable. Disable daylight saving time.

• Recurring. Daylight saving time occurs at the same time every year. The start and

end times and dates for the time shift must be manually configured.

• Recurring EU. The system clock uses the standard recurring daylight saving time

settings used in countries in the European Union. When this option is selected, the

rest of the applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be

edited.

• Recurring USA. The system clock uses the standard recurring daylight saving time

settings used in the United States. When this option is selected, the rest of the

applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.

• Non Recurring. Daylight saving time settings are in effect only between the start date

and end date of the specified year. When this option is selected, the daylight saving

time settings do not repeat on an annual basis.

If you select any radio button other than the Disable radio button (which is the default

selection), the page adjusts to display additional fields.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual42

7. Configure how the daylight saving settings recur as described in the following table.

Field Description

Begins At

Note: These fields do not apply if you select

the Recurring EU radio button or the

Recurring USA radio button.

If you select the Recurring radio button, specify the start

date and time of daylight saving time in the following fields:

• Week. Configure the start week.

• Day. Configure the start day.

• Month. Configure the start month.

• Hours. Configure the start hour.

• Minutes. Configure the start minute.

If you select the Non Recurring radio button, specify the

start date and time of daylight saving in the following fields:

• Year. Configure the start year.

• Date. Configure the start date.

• Month. Configure the start month.

• Hours. Configure the start hour.

• Minutes. Configure the start minute.

Ends At

Note: These fields do not apply if you select

the Recurring EU radio button or the

Recurring USA radio button.

If you select the Recurring radio button, specify the end

date and time of daylight saving in the following fields:

• Week. Configure the end week.

• Day. Configure the end day.

• Month. Configure the end month.

• Hours. Configure the end hour.

• Minutes. Configure the end minute.

If you select the Non Recurring radio button, specify the

end date and time of daylight saving in the following fields:

• Year. Configure the end year.

• Date. Configure the end date.

• Month. Configure the end month.

• Hours. Configure the end hour.

• Minutes. Configure the end minute.

Offset

Note: These fields do not apply if you select

the Recurring radio button or the Non

Recurring radio button.

If you select the Recurring EU radio button or the

Recurring USA radio button, you must specify the recurring

offset of daylight saving time in minutes. This is the offset in

relation to regular time, that is, when daylight saving time is

not in effect. The default setting (offset) is 60 minutes.

Zone

Note: These fields do not apply if you select

the Recurring radio button or the Non

Recurring radio button.

If you select the Recurring EU radio button or the

Recurring USA radio button, you can specify the acronym

associated with the time zone in which daylight saving is in

effect. This field is not validated against any official list of

time zone acronyms.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual43

View the DayLight Saving Time Status

You can view the status of daylight saving time (DST), including information about the

daylight saving time settings and whether the time offset for daylight saving time is in effect.

To view the daylight saving time status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration.

The DayLight Saving (DST) Status page displays.

6. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table displays the nonconfigurable daylight saving status information.

Table 9. Daylight Saving (DST) Status information

Field Description

DayLight Saving (DST) The Daylight Saving value, which is one of the following:

• Disable

• Recurring

• Recurring EU

• Recurring USA

• Non Recurring

Begins At Displays when the daylight saving time begins. This field is not

displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.

Ends At Displays when the daylight saving time ends. This field is not displayed

when daylight saving time is disabled.

Offset (in Minutes) The offset value in minutes.This field is not displayed when daylight

saving time is disabled.

Zone The zone acronym, if any was specified. This field is not displayed

when daylight saving time is disabled.

Daylight Saving (DST) in Effect Displays whether daylight saving time is in effect.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual44

Configure DNS Settings

Use these pages to configure information about DNS servers that the network uses and how

the switch operates as a DNS client.

Configure Global DNS Settings

Use the DNS Configuration page to configure global DNS settings and DNS server

information.

To configure the global DNS settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration.

The DNS Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Disable or Enable radio button to specify whether to disable or enable the

administrative status of the DNS client:

• Enable. Allow the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS

domain name. The DNS is enabled by default.

• Disable. Prevent the switch from sending DNS queries.

7. In the DNS Default Name field, enter the default DNS domain name to include in DNS

queries.

When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified host name, this field is

provides the domain name (for example, if default domain name is netgear.com and the

user enters test, then test is changed to test.netgear.com to resolve the name). The name

must not be longer than 158 characters.

8. To add a DSN server, do the following:

a. In the DNS Server field in the DNS Server Configuration table, specify the IPv4

address to which the switch sends DNS queries.

b. Click the Add button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual45

The server is added to the list. You can specify up to eight DNS servers. The Preference

field displays the server preference order. The preference is set in the order in which

preferences were entered.

9. To remove a DNS server from the list, do the following:

a. Select the check box for the server.

b. Click the Delete button.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

11. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information.

Table 10. DNS Server Configuration information

Field Description

ID The identification of the DNS Server.

Preference Shows the preference of the DNS server. The preferences are

determined by the order in which they were entered.

Configure and View Host Name-to-IP Address Information

Use this page to manually map host names to IP addresses or to view dynamic host

mappings.

Add a Static Entry to the Dynamic Host Mapping Table

To add a static entry to the local dynamic host mapping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The DNS Host Configuration page displays.

6. In the Host Name (1 to 158 characters) field, specify the static host name to add.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual46

Its length cannot exceed 158 characters and it is a required field.

7. In the IPv4/IPv6 Address field, enter the IP address to associate with the host name.

8. Click the Add button.

The entry displays in the list on the page.

Remove an Entry From the Dynamic Host Mapping Table

To remove an entry from the dynamic host mapping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The DNS Host Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the entry to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The entry is removed.

Change the Host Name or IP Address in an Entry of the Dynamic Host Mapping Table and

View All Entries

To change the host name or IP address in an entry of the dynamic host mapping table

and view all entries:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual47

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The DNS Host Configuration page display.

6. Select the check box for the entry to update.

7. Enter the new information in the appropriate field.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

9. To clear all the dynamic host name entries from the list, click the Clear button.

The Dynamic Host Mapping table shows host name-to-IP address entries that the switch

learned. The following table describes the dynamic host fields.

Table 11. Dynamic Host Mapping information

Field Description

Host The host name that you assign to the specified IP address.

Type The type of the dynamic entry.

IPv4/IPv6 Address The IP address associated with the host name.

Configure Green Ethernet Settings

Use this page to globally configure Green Ethernet features. Using the Green Ethernet

Configuration features allows for power consumption savings.

To configure the Green Ethernet settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Configuration.

The Green Ethernet Configuration page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual48

Auto Power Down mode is enabled globally, but you can disable it on a per-port basis for

ports g1–g4 (see Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration on page 57). You

cannot disable it for other ports. If Auto Power Down mode is enabled on a port and the

port link goes down, the physical layer (PHY) automatically shuts down for a short period

and wakes up to check link pulses. This mode reduces power consumption on a port if no

link partner is present.

Short Cable mode is enabled globally, but you can disable it on a per-port basis for ports

g1–g4 (see Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration on page 57). You cannot

disable it for other ports. If Short Cable mode is enabled on a port, and the cable length is

too short, the PHY enters low-power mode.

6. Select the EEE Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC with a family of physical layers that

support operation in a low power mode. It is defined by IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient

Task Force. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive sides of the link to

disable some functionality for power savings when lightly loaded. Transition to low power

mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not dropped or corrupted in

transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is transparent to upper layer

protocols and applications.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Green Ethernet Interface Settings

Use this page to configure per-port Green Ethernet settings.

To configure the Green Ethernet interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Interface

Configuration.

The Green Ethernet Interface Configuration page displays.

6. Do one of the following:

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual49

•In the Go To Interface field, enter the port using the respective naming convention

(for example, g1 or g12), and click the Go button.

The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected.

For more information about naming conventions, see Interface Naming Conventions

on page 13.

•Select the port.

7. From the Auto Power Down Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

The default is Disable, which is the global setting (see Configure the Global PoE

Settings on page 56). For ports g1–g4 only, you can disable the mode.

8. From the Short Cable Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

The default is Disable, which is the global setting (see Configure the Global PoE

Settings on page 56). For ports g1–g4 only, you can disable the mode.

9. From the EEE Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

The default is Disable. If the EEE mode is not supported, then N/A is displayed.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Green Ethernet Settings for Local Devices

Use this page to configure and view detailed per-port green Ethernet settings for local

devices.

To configure and view green Ethernet for local devices:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Details.

The Local Device Information page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual50

7. To disable the Energy Detect Admin Mode for port g1, g2, g3, or g4, from the Energy

Detect Admin Mode, select Disable.

The Energy Detect Admin Mode is enabled globally, but you can disable it for ports g1–g4

only. With this mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during a link idle

condition.

The Operational Status field shows whether the energy detect operational status is active

or inactive.

The Reason field shows the reason for the operational status.

8. To disable the Short Reach Admin mode for port g1, g2, g3, or g4, from the Short Reach

Admin mod, select Disable.

The Energy Detect Admin Mode is enabled globally, but you can disable it for ports g1–g4

only. With this mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode when the cable

length is too short.

The Operational Status field shows whether the short reach operational status is active or

inactive.

The Reason field shows the reason for the operational status.

9. Use the EEE Admin Mode menu to enable or disable this option on the port.

With the EEE mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during a link idle

condition. The default value is Disable.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

11. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

12. To clear the configuration, resetting all statistics for the selected interface to default values,

click the Clear button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 12. Green Ethernet Local Device Information

Field Description

Tw_sys_tx (uSec) The value of Tw_sys that the local system can support.

Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec) The remote system’s Transmit Tw_sys that was used by the local

system to compute the Tw_sys that is requested from the remote

system.

Tw_sys_rx (uSec) The value of Tw_sys that the local system requests from the remote

system.

Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec) The remote system’s Receive Tw_sys that is used by the local system

to compute the Tw_sys that it can support.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual51

View Green Ethernet Information for Remote Devices

To view green Ethernet information for remote devices:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet >Green Ethernet Details.

The Green Ethernet Details page displays.

6. Scroll down to the Remote Device Information section.

7. Form the Interface menu, select the interface.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 13. Green Ethernet Remote Device Information

Field Description

Remote ID The remote client identifier assigned to the remote system.

Remote Tw_sys_tx (uSec) The value of Tw_sys that the remote system can support.

Remote Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec) The value of Transmit Tw_sys echoed back by the remote system.

Remote Tw_sys_rx (uSec) The value of Tw_sys that the remote system requests from the local

system.

Remote Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec) The value of Receive Tw_sys echoed back by the remote system.

View the Green Ethernet Statistics Summary

This page summarizes the green Ethernet settings currently in use.

To view the green Ethernet statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual52

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Summary.

The Green Mode Statistics Summary page displays. The page shows the Green Ethernet

Interface Summary section.

6. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 14. Green Ethernet Statistics Summary information

Field Description

Cumulative Energy Saving

(Watts*Hours)

The estimated cumulative energy saved in watts * hours when all green

modes are enabled.

Interface The interface for which data is displayed or configured.

Energy Detect Admin mode Shows whether Energy Detect mode is enabled or disabled on the port.

If this mode is enabled and the port link goes down, the PHY

automatically goes down for a short period of time, then wakes up to

check link pulses. This allows the switch to perform autonegotiation

and save power consumption when no link partner is present.

Energy Detect Operational Status The current operational status of the Energy Detect mode.

Short Reach Admin mode Shows whether Short Reach Admin mode is enabled or disabled on the

port. When this mode is enabled, the PHY is forced to operate in low

power mode irrespective of the cable length.

Short Reach Operational Status The current operational status of the Short Reach mode.

EEE Admin mode Shows whether Energy Efficient Ethernet mode is enabled or disabled

on the port. When this mode is enabled, the port transitions to low

power mode during link idle conditions.

Use the Device View

For information about the device view, see Local Browser Interface Device View on page 21.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual53

Configure Power over Ethernet

Note: This section applies to model MS510TXPP only.

A Power over Ethernet (PoE) device is a type of power sourcing equipment (PSE) that

delivers electrical power to connected powered devices (PDs) over existing Ethernet cables

without interfering with the network traffic.

From the System > PoE menu, you can access pages that are described in the following

sections:

•PoE Overview on page 53

•Device Class Power Requirements on page 54

•Power Allocation and Power Budget on page 54

•Configure the Global PoE Settings on page 56

•Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration on page 57

PoE Overview

Model MS510TXPP supports both IEEE 802.3af (PoE) and IEEE 802.3at (PoE+) on ports

1–8 with a maximum PoE power budget of 180W across all active PoE+ ports. You can

globally specify the following:

•Limit port power based on the PD class or on user settings.

•Allow detection of both standards (802.3af and 802.3at)–based and legacy

(pre-standard)–based PDs.

•Allow detection only of standard-based PDs.

•Enable or disable PoE related traps.

The power limit of a port is based on the global setting of the power limit type. If the power

limit type is based on the PD class, the port limit is based on the class that is advertised by

the PD attached to the port. If the power limit type is based on the user settings, the port limit

is based on the maximum power limit that you configure for the port (the default is 30W).

On a per-port basis, you can enable or disable PoE and configure priority settings, timers,

and power limits. Doing so allows you to manage the power supplied to the connected PDs

and to ensure that the power budget is used effectively.

By default, supplied power is prioritized on the switch in ascending port order, up to the total

power budget of the switch. If the power requirements for the attached PDs exceed the total

power budget of the switch, the power to the device on the highest-numbered PoE+ port is

disabled to make sure that the devices connected to the higher-priority, lower-numbered

PoE+ ports are supported first.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual54

Note: Although a device is listed as an 802.3at (PoE+) powered or 802.3af

(PoE) powered device, it might not require the maximum power limit

that is specified. Many devices require less power, allowing all eight

PoE ports to be active simultaneously, when the devices correctly

report their PoE class to the switch.

Device Class Power Requirements

PoE and PoE+ use Ethernet cables to supply power to PoE-capable devices on the network,

such as WiFi access points, IP cameras, VoIP phones, and switches. The switch is compliant

with the IEEE 802.3at standard (PoE+) and backward compatible with the IEEE 802.3af

standard (PoE). The switch can pass power through to any powered device (PD) that

supports these standards. PoE and PoE+ let you power such devices without the need for a

separate power supply.

The switch supports a Plug-and-Play process by which it detects the type of device that is

connected to one of its PoE+ ports and whether that device needs power and how much so

that the switch can provide the correct power the device.

During the Plug-and-Play process, the connected device can provide its Class response to

the switch in many ways, depending on how the vendor programmed the device.

The following table shows the device classes for PoE+ devices adhering to the IEEE 802.3at

standard. The device classes for PoE devices adhering to the IEEE 802.3af standard are

identical with the exception that Device Class 4 is not supported.

Table 15. PoE and PoE+ device class power allocation

Device

Class

Standard Range of Power

Delivered to the

Powered Device

Minimum Output at

PoE Switch Port

(Minimum Allocated)

Maximum Output at

PoE Switch Port

(Maximum Allocated)

0 PoE and PoE+ 0.44W–12.95W 15.4W 16.2W

1 PoE and PoE+ 0.44W–3.84W 4.0W 4.2W

2 PoE and PoE+ 3.84W–6.49W 7.0W 7.4W

3 PoE and PoE+ 6.49W–12.95W 15.4W 16.2W

4 PoE+ only 12.95W–25.5W 30.0W 31.6W

Power Allocation and Power Budget

The switch is a smart switch in that it can allocate the required power to a connected device

by using a prioritization scheme: By default, power is supplied in ascending port order (that is,

lower port numbers are served first) until the power budget is consumed and insufficient

power remains to allocate to the next device. When less than 7W of PoE power is available

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual55

on a port, the port PoE LED lights yellow, and the attached device does not receive power

from the port. However, the switch continues to send data through the port connection.

The switch is also a smart switch in that it can override the IEEE power classification of a

powered device (PD): If the PD consumes less power than required by its power

classification, the switch provides only the power that the PD consumes instead of the power

that is required by the PD’s power classification.

If some PoE+ ports are in use and deliver power, you can calculate the available power

budget for the other PoE+ ports by subtracting the consumed (that is, delivered power) from

the total available power budget. (For information about the total available power budget, see

PoE Overview on page 53.)

An example:

Port 1 delivers 4.4W to a PD. The available power budget is 175.6W (180W–4.4W).

Another example:

A Class 4 PD is attached to Port 1, a Class 2 PD to Port 2, and another Class 4 PD to Port 3.

However, the PDs consume less power than defined by their classes: The PD attached to

Port 1 consumes 7.3W, the PD attached to Port 2 consumes 4.7W, and the PD attached to

Port 3 consumes 8.9W. So even though the switch provides power to two Class 4 devices

and one Class 3 device, the available power budget is 159.1W (180W–7.3–4.7–8.9W).

To determine the delivered power by PoE+ ports:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual56

The delivered power is stated in the Output Power (Watt) column.

Configure the Global PoE Settings

To configure the global PoE settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the password field.

The default password is password. If you added the switch to a network on the Insight

app before and you did not yet change the password through the local browser interface,

enter your Insight network password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > PoE > Basic > PoE Configuration.

The PoE Configuration page displays.

6. Select one of the following Power Limit Type radio buttons:

• Class. The maximum amount of power that can be delivered to a port is determined

by the class of the attached PD.

• User. The maximum amount of power that can be delivered to a port is determined by

the power limit settings for the port (see Manage and View the PoE Port

Configuration on page 57). This is the default setting.

7. Select one of the following Detection Type radio buttons:

• IEEE 802 + Legacy. The ports support the IEEE 802.3at standard (PoE+), the IEEE

802.3af standard (PoE), and legacy PDs that require high-inrush current of more than

15W to power up. This is the default setting.

• IEEE 802. The ports support the IEEE 802.3at standard (PoE+) and the IEEE 802.3af

standard (PoE) but do not support legacy PDs.

8. Select one of the following Traps radio buttons:

• Disable. No PoE traps are generated. This is the default setting.

• Enable. PoE traps are generated if a PoE event occurs. PoE events could include

events such as a port starting or stopping providing PoE power or the switch reaching

a threshold power level.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your setting are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual57

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 16. PoE Configuration fields

Field Description

Power Status The power status.

Nominal Power The maximum amount of power in watts that the switch can deliver to all ports.

Threshold Power If the consumed power is below the threshold power, the switch can power up another port.

The consumed power can be between the nominal and threshold power. The threshold

power is displayed in watts.

Consumed Power The total amount of power in watts that is being delivered to all ports.

Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration

Depending on the model, the switch includes eight PoE+ ports.

To configure and view the PoE+ port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration.

6. In the Interface column, select the check boxes for the PoE+ ports that you want to

configure or select the check box in the heading to configure the same settings for all eight

PoE+ ports.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual58

7. Configure the settings as described in the following table.

The settings that you configure apply to all selected PoE+ ports.

Menu Item Description

Port Power Select the administrative mode of the port:

• Enable. The port’s capacity to deliver power is enabled. This is the default

setting.

• Disable. The port’s capacity to deliver power is disabled.

Port Priority The port priority determines which ports can still deliver power after the total

power delivered by the switch exceeds the total power budget of 180W. (In such a

situation, the switch might not be able to deliver power to all connected devices.)

If the same priority applies to two ports, the lower-numbered port receives higher

priority.

Select one of the following priorities:

• Low. Low priority. This is the default setting.

• Medium. Medium priority.

• High. High priority.

Timer Schedule If you set up a PoE timer schedule, you can assign it to the port by selecting the

schedule from the Timer Schedule menu.

For information about PoE timer schedules, see Set Up PoE Timer Schedules on

page 82. By default, the selection from the menu is None.

If you want to remove a previously assigned timer schedule, select None from the

Timer Schedule menu.

Power Limit (W) Enter the maximum power milliwatt (mW) that the port can deliver.

The maximum and default power is 30,000 mW.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the PoE Port Configuration

page.

Field Description

High Power If a port supports High Power mode, the field displays Yes.

Class The class defines the range of power a powered device (PD) is drawing from the

switch. The class definitions are as follows:

• 0: 0.44–16.2W

• 1: 0.44–4.2W

• 2: 0.44–7.4W

• 3: 0.44–16.2W

• 4: 0.44–31.6W

Output Voltage (Volts) The voltage that is delivered to the PD in volts.

Output Current (mA) The current that is delivered to the PD in mA.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual59

Configure SNMP

You can configure SNMP settings for SNMPv1/v2 and SNMPv3. The switch supports the

configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage traps that the SNMP agent

generates.

The switch uses both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private MIBs that

support additional switch functionality. All private MIBs begin with a hyphen (-) prefix. The

main object for interface configuration is in -SWITCHING-MIB, which is a private MIB. Some

interface configurations also involve objects in the public MIB, IF-MIB.

Output Power (W) The power that is delivered to the PD in watts.

Status The operational status of the port. The possible values are as follows:

• Disabled. No power is delivered.

• Delivering Power. Power is being drawn by the PD.

• Requesting Power. The port is requesting power.

• Fault. A problem occurred with the power.

• Test. The port is in test mode.

• Other Fault. The port is idle because of an error condition.

• Searching. The port is not in one of the other states in this list.

Fault Status The description when the PoE port is in a fault or non-errors state. The possible

values are as follows:

• Port is off. Detection is in process. The port is not delivering power but can

detect whether a PD is being attached to the port.

• No Error. The port is not in any error state and provides power.

The fault status can also be any of the following:

• Main supply high voltage.

• Main supply low voltage.

• Hardware pin disabled.

• Non 802-3af powered device.

• Overload.

• Underload.

• Overload and underload.

• Budget exceeded.

• Voltage injection.

• Improper capacitor detection.

• Discharged load.

• Forced power – overload.

• Short.

• Port overheat.

• Device overheat.

• Class error.

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual60

From the System > SNMP menu, you can access pages that are described in the following

sections:

•Configure the SNMPv1/v2 Community on page 60

•Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Settings on page 62

•Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Flags on page 64

•View the Supported MIBs on page 65

•Configure SNMPv3 Users on page 65

Configure the SNMPv1/v2 Community

Only the communities that you define can access to the switch using the SNMP V1 and

SNMP V2 protocols. Only those communities with read/write level access can be used to

change the configuration using SNMP.

Add an SNMP Community:

To add an SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

6. In the Management Station IP field, specify the IP address of the management station.

7. In the Management Station IP Mask field, specify the subnet mask to associate with the

management station IP address.

Together, the management station IP and the management station IP mask denote a

range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients can use that community to access this

device. If either the management station IP or management station IP mask value is

0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP address. Otherwise, every client’s address is

ANDed with the mask, as is the management station IP address. If the values are equal,

access is allowed. For example, if the management station IP and management station IP

mask parameters are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, then any client whose address is

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual61

192.168.1.0 through 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) is allowed access. To allow access from

only one station, use a management station IP mask value of 255.255.255.255, and use

that machine’s IP address for client address.

8. In the Community String field, specify a community name.

9. From the Access Mode menu, select the access level for this community, which is either

Read/Write or Read Only.

10. From the Status menu, select to enable or disable the community.

If you select Enable, the community name must be unique among all valid community

names or the set requests are rejected. If you select Disable, the community name

becomes invalid.

11. Click the Add button.

The selected community is added.

Modify an Existing SNMP Community

To modify an existing SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the community.

7. Update the desired fields.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an SNMP Community

To delete an SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual62

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the community to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The community is removed.

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Settings

You can configure settings for each SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 management host that must

receive notifications about traps generated by the device. The SNMP management host is

also known as the SNMP trap receiver.

Add an SNMP Trap Receiver

To add an SNMP trap receiver:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual63

6. In the Recipients IP field, enter the IPv4 address in the x.x.x.x format to receive SNMP

traps from this device.

7. From the Version menu, select the trap version to be used by the SNMP trap receiver:

• SNMPv1. The switch uses SNMPv1 to send traps to the receiver.

• SNMPv2. The switch uses SNMPv2 to send traps to the receiver.

8. In the Community String field, specify the name of the SNMP community that includes

the SNMP management host and the SNMP agent on the device.

This name can be up to 16 characters and is case-sensitive.

9. Click the Add button.

The receiver configuration is added.

Modify Information About an Existing SNMP Recipient

To modify information about an existing SNMP recipient:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the recipient.

7. Update the fields as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an SNMP Recipient

To delete an SNMP trap recipient:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual64

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the recipient to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The trap recipient is removed.

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Flags

Use the Trap Flags page to enable or disable traps the switch can send to an SNMP

manager. When the condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch, a trap

message is sent to any enabled SNMP trap receivers, and a message is written to the trap

log.

To configure the trap flags:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Trap Flags.

The Trap Flags page displays.

6. Configure the following options:

• All. Globally activate or disable all traps by selecting the corresponding radio button.

By default, the Enable radio button is selected.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual65

• Authentication. When authentication is enabled, SNMP traps are sent when events

involving authentication occur. By default, the Enable radio button is selected.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the Supported MIBs

This page displays a list of all MIBs supported by the switch.

To view the supported MIBs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 > Supported MIBs.

The Status page displays.

The following table describes the fields on the Status page.

Table 17. SNMP supported MIBs

Field Description

Name The RFC number (if applicable) and the name of the MIB.

Description The RFC title or MIB description.

Configure SNMPv3 Users

Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMPv3 protocol, but for authentication and

encryption, the switch supports only one user (admin). Therefore, you can create or modify

only one profile.

To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMPv3 admin profile by

using the web interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual66

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv3 > User Configuration.

The User Configuration page displays.

The SNMPv3 Access Mode field is a read-only field that shows the access privileges for

the user account. Access for the admin account is always Read/Write. Access for all

other accounts is Read Only.

6. To enable authentication, select an Authentication Protocol radio button.

You can select the MD5 radio button or the SHA radio button. With either of these

options, the user login password is used as SNMPv3 authentication password. For

information about how to configure the login password, see Change the Password on

page 218.

7. To enable encryption, do the following:

a. Select the Encryption Protocol DES radio button to encrypt SNMPv3 packets using

the DES encryption protocol.

b. In the Encryption key field, enter an encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric

characters.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure LLDP

The IEEE 802.1AB-defined standard, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), allows stations

on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. This information is

viewed by a network manager to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on

the LAN.

From the System > LLDP > Advanced menu, you can access pages that are described in

the following sections:

•Configure LLDP Global Settings on page 67

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual67

•Configure LLDP Port Settings on page 68

•LLDP-MED Network Policy on page 70

•LLDP-MED Port Settings on page 71

•Local Information on page 72

•Neighbors Information on page 74

LLDP is a one-way protocol without any request/response sequences. Information is

advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by

stations implementing the receive function. The transmit and receive functions can be

enabled or disabled separately per port. By default, both transmit and receive are disabled on

all ports. The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine

appropriately, based on the configured status and operational state of the port.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an

enhancement to LLDP with the following features:

•Autodiscovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 priority, and DiffServ settings),

enabling plug and play networking.

•Device location discovery for creation of location databases.

•Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints.

•Inventory management, enabling network administrators to track their network devices

and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions,

serial/asset number).

Configure LLDP Global Settings

Use the LLDP Configuration page to specify the global LLDP and LLDP-MED parameters

that are applied to the switch.

To configure global LLDP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Basic > LLDP Configuration.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual68

The LLDP Properties page displays. The page also displays the LLDP-MED Properties

section.

6. To configure nondefault values for the following LLDP properties, specify the following

options:

• LLDP Status. Enable or disable the LLDP feature.

• Forward LLDP PDUs while LLDP Disabled. Enable or disable this feature.

If you select the Enable radio button for this feature but the LLDP Status Disable

radio button is selected, LLDP PDUs are flooded to all ports. By default, this setting is

disabled, which means that LLDP PDUs are dropped if the LLDP Status Disable radio

button is selected.

• TLV Advertised Interval. The number of seconds between transmissions of LLDP

advertisements.

• Hold Multiplier. The transmit interval multiplier value, where transmit hold multiplier x

transmit interval = the time to live (TTL) value that the device advertises to neighbors.

• Re-initializing Delay. The number of seconds to wait before attempting to re-initialize

LLDP on a port after the LLDP operating mode on the port changes.

• Transmit Delay. The minimum number of seconds to wait between transmissions of

remote data change notifications to one or more SNMP trap receivers configured on

the switch.

7. To configure a nondefault value for LLDP-MED, enter a value in the Fast Start Duration

field.

This value sets the number of LLDP packets sent when the LLDP-MED fast start

mechanism is initialized, which occurs when a new endpoint device links with the

LLDP-MED network connectivity device.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure LLDP Port Settings

Use the LLDP Port Settings page to specify per-interface LLDP settings.

To configure the LLDP interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual69

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP Port Settings.

The LLDP Port Settings page displays.

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. Use the following menus to configure the LLDP settings for the selected ports:

• Admin Status. Select the status for transmitting and receiving LLDP packets:

- Tx Only. Enable only transmitting LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

- Rx Only. Enable only receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

- Tx and Rx. Enable both transmitting and receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected

ports.

- Disable. Do not transmit or receive LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

The default is Tx and Rx.

• Management IP Address. Choose whether to advertise the management IP address

from the interface. The possible field values are as follows:

- Stop Advertise. Do not advertise the management IP address from the interface.

- Auto Advertise. Advertise the current IP address of the device as the

management IP address.

The default is Auto Advertise.

• Notification. When notifications are enabled, LLDP interacts with the trap manager to

notify subscribers of remote data change statistics. The default is Disable.

• Optional TLV(s). Enable or disable the transmission of optional type-length value

(TLV) information from the interface. The default is Enable. The TLV information

includes the system name, system description, system capabilities, and port

description.

For information about how to configure the system name, see View and Configure

the Switch Management Settings on page 26. For information about how to

configure the port description, see Configure the Port Settings on page 90.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual70

LLDP-MED Network Policy

This page displays information about the LLPD-MED network policy TLV transmitted in the

LLDP frames on the selected local interface.

To view LLDP-MED network policy information for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Network Policy.

The LLDP-MED Network Policy page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want to view the information.

Note: The menu includes only the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled. If no

interfaces are enabled for LLDP, the Interface menu does not display.

The page refreshes and displays the data transmitted in the network policy TLVs for the

interface.

The following table describes the LLDP-MED network policy information that displays on the

page.

Table 18. LLDP-MED network policy information

Field Description

Network Policy Number The policy number.

Application The media application type that is associated with the policy. Only the voice

application type is supported. The application type that is received on the

interface includes the VLAN ID, priority, DSCP, tagged bit status, and unknown

bit status. The application information is displayed only if a network policy TLV

was transmitted from the port.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Indicates whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual71

LLDP-MED Port Settings

Use this page to enable LLDP-MED mode on an interface and configure its properties.

To configure LLDP-MED settings for a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Port Settings.

The LLDP-MED Port Settings page displays.

6. From the Port menu, select the port to configure.

7. Use the following menus to enable or disable the following LLDP-MED settings for the

selected port:

• LLDP-MED Status. The administrative status of LLDP-MED on the interface. When

LLDP-MED is enabled, the transmit and receive function of LLDP is effectively

enabled on the interface.

• Notification. When enabled, the port sends a topology change notification if a device

is connected or removed.

• Transmit Optional TLVs. When enabled, the port transmits the following optional

TLVs in the LLDP PDU frames:

-MED Capabilities

-Location Identification

-Extended Power via MDI: PSE

-Extended Power via MDI: PD

-Inventory

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Table 18. LLDP-MED network policy information (continued)

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual72

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Local Information

Use the LLDP Local Information page to view the data that each port advertises through

LLDP.

To view local LLDP information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Advanced > LLDP > Local Information.

The Device Information page displays. The page also displays the Port Information

section.

The page includes only the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled.

The following table describes the LLDP device information and port summary information.

Field Description

Device Information

Chassis ID Subtype The type of information used to identify the switch in the Chassis ID field.

Chassis ID The hardware platform identifier for the switch.

System Name The user-configured system name for the switch.

System Description The switch description, which includes information about the product model

and platform.

System Capabilities The primary functions that the switch supports.

Interface The interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.

LLDP Local Information

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual73

6. To view additional details about a port, click the port (which is a hyperlink) in the Interface

column of the Port Information table.

The following table describes the detailed local information that displays for the selected

port.

Port ID Subtype The type of information used to identify the interface in the Port ID field.

Port ID The port number.

Port Description The user-defined description of the port. For information about how to

configure the port description, see Configure the Port Settings on page 90.

Advertisement The TLV advertisement status of the port.

Field Description

Managed Address

Address SubType The type of address the management interface uses, such as an IPv4

address.

Address The address used to manage the device.

Interface SubType The port subtype.

Interface Number The number that identifies the port.

MAC/PHY Details

Auto Negotiation Supported Indicates whether the interface supports port speed autonegotiation. The

possible values are True and False.

Auto Negotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The possible values are True

(enabled) or False (disabled).

Auto Negotiation Advertised

Capabilities

The port speed autonegotiation capabilities such as 1000BASE-T half-duplex

mode or 100BASE-TX full-duplex mode.

Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer

functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface

collision detection and bit injection into the network.

MED Details

Capabilities Supported The MED capabilities enabled on the port.

Current Capabilities The TLVs advertised by the port.

Device Class Network Connectivity indicates that the device is a network connectivity

device.

Network Policies

Application Type The media application type associated with the policy.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual74

Neighbors Information

Use the LLDP Neighbors Information page to view the data that a specified interface received

from other LLDP-enabled systems.

To view LLDP information received from a neighbor device:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Advanced > LLDP > Neighbor Information.

The Neighbors Information page displays.

If no information was received from a neighbor device, or if the link partner is not

LLDP-enabled, no information displays.

The following table describes the information that displays for all LLDP neighbors that

were discovered.

VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Field Description

MSAP Entry The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote

device.

Local Port The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a

remote system.

Chassis ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.

Chassis ID The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.

Port ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual75

6. To view additional information about the remote device, click the hyperlink in the MSAP

Entry column.

A pop-up window displays information for the selected port.

The following table describes the information transmitted by the neighbor.

Port ID The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data

was sent.

System Name The system name associated with the remote device. If the field is blank, the

name might not be configured on the remote system.

Field Description

Port Details

Local Port The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a

remote system.

MSAP Entry The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote device.

Basic Details

Chassis ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.

Chassis ID The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.

Port ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.

Port ID The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data

was sent.

Port Description The user-defined description of the port.

System Name The system name associated with the remote device.

System Description The description of the selected port associated with the remote system.

System Capabilities The system capabilities of the remote system.

Managed Addresses

Address SubType The type of the management address.

Address The advertised management address of the remote system.

Interface SubType The port subtype.

Interface Number The port on the remote device that sent the information.

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual76

MAC/PHY Details

Auto-Negotiation Supported Specifies whether the remote device supports port-speed autonegotiation.

The possible values are True or False.

Auto-Negotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The possible values are True

and False.

Auto Negotiation Advertised

Capabilities

The port speed autonegotiation capabilities.

Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer

functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface

collision detection and bit injection into the network.

MED Details

Capabilities Supported The supported capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.

Current Capabilities The advertised capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.

Device Class The LLDP-MED endpoint device class. The possible device classes are as

follows:

• Endpoint Class 1 Indicates a generic endpoint class, offering basic LLDP

services.

• Endpoint Class 2 Indicates a media endpoint class, offering media

streaming capabilities as well as all Class 1 features.

• Endpoint Class 3 Indicates a communications device class, offering all

Class 1 and Class 2 features plus location, 911, Layer 2 switch support,

and device information management capabilities.

PoE Device Type The type of PoE for the port, for example, powered.

PoE Power Source The power source for the port.

PoE Power Priority The power priority for the port.

PoE Power Value The power value for the port.

Hardware Revision The hardware version advertised by the remote device.

Firmware Revision The firmware version advertised by the remote device.

Software Revision The software version advertised by the remote device.

Serial Number The serial number advertised by the remote device.

Manufacturer Name The manufacturer name advertised by the remote device.

Model Name The model name advertised by the remote device.

Asset ID The asset ID advertised by the remote device.

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual77

Configure DHCP Snooping

DHCP snooping is a useful feature that provides security by filtering untrusted DHCP

messages and by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table. An untrusted

message is a message that is received from outside the network or firewall and that can

cause traffic attacks within your network. The DHCP snooping binding table contains the

MAC address, IP address, lease time, binding type, VLAN number, and interface information

that corresponds to the local untrusted interfaces of a switch. An untrusted interface is an

interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall. A

trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the

network.

DHCP snooping acts like a firewall between untrusted hosts and DHCP servers. It also

provides way to differentiate between untrusted interfaces connected to the end user and

trusted interfaces connected to the DHCP server or another switch.

Location Information

Civic The physical location, such as the street address, that the remote device

advertised in the location TLV, for example, 123 45th St. E. The field value

length range is 6–160 characters.

Coordinates The location map coordinates that the remote device advertised in the

location TLV, including latitude, longitude, and altitude.

ECS ELIN The Emergency Call Service (ECS) Emergency Location Identification

Number (ELIN) that the remote device advertised in the location TLV. The

field range is 10–25.

Unknown Displays unknown location information for the remote device.

Network Policies

Application Type The media application type associated with the policy advertised by the

remote device.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

LLDP Unknown TLVs

Type The unknown TLV type field.

Value The unknown TLV value field.

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual78

From the System > Services menu, you can access pages that are described in the

following sections:

•Configure the Global DHCP Snooping Settings on page 78

•Enable DHCP for All Interfaces in a VLAN on page 79

•Configure DHCP Snooping Interface Settings on page 79

•Configure Static DHCP Bindings on page 80

•Configure the DHCP Snooping Persistent Settings on page 82

Configure the Global DHCP Snooping Settings

Use this page to view and configure the global settings for DHCP snooping.

To configure the global DHCP snooping settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

The DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page displays.

6. Select the DHCP Snooping Mode Enable radio button.

7. To enable the verification of the sender’s MAC address for DHCP snooping, select the MAC

Address Validation Enable radio button.

When MAC address validation is enabled, the device checks packets that are received on

an untrusted interface to verify that the MAC address and the DHCP client hardware

address match. If the addresses do not match, the device drops the packet.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual79

Enable DHCP for All Interfaces in a VLAN

To enable DHCP snooping for all interfaces that are members of a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

The DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN on which DHCP snooping is enabled.

7. From the DHCP Snooping Mode menu, select Enable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure DHCP Snooping Interface Settings

Use the DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration page to view and configure each port as a

trusted or untrusted port. Any DHCP responses received on a trusted port are forwarded. If a

port is configured as untrusted, any DHCP (or BootP) responses received on that port are

discarded.

To configure DHCP snooping interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual80

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Interface Configuration.

The DHCP Snooping Interface Configuration page displays.

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Trust Mode menu, select the desired trust mode:

• Disabled. The interface is considered to be untrusted and could potentially be used to

launch a network attack. DHCP server messages are checked against the bindings

database. On untrusted ports, DHCP snooping enforces the following security rules:

-DHCP packets from a DHCP server (DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,

DHCPRELEASEQUERY) are dropped.

-DHCPRELEASE and DHCPDECLINE messages are dropped if the MAC address

is in the snooping database but the binding’s interface is other than the interface

where the message was received.

-DHCP packets are dropped when the source MAC address does not match the

client hardware address if MAC address validation is globally enabled.

• Enabled. The interface is considered to be trusted and forwards DHCP server

messages without validation.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Static DHCP Bindings

Use this page to view, add, and remove static bindings in the DHCP snooping bindings

database and to view or clear the dynamic bindings in the bindings table.

To configure static DHCP bindings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual81

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Binding Configuration.

The Static Binding Configuration page displays. The page also shows the Dynamic

Binding Configuration section.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface on which the DHCP client is authorized.

7. In the MAC Address field, specify the MAC address for the binding to be added.

This is the key to the binding database.

8. From the VLAN ID menu, select the ID of the VLAN the client is authorized to use.

9. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address of the client.

10. Click the Add button.

The DHCP snooping binding entry is added to the database.

The Dynamic Binding Configuration table shows information about the DHCP bindings that

were learned on each interface on which DHCP snooping is enabled.

Table 19. DHCP Dynamic Configuration information

Field Description

Interface The interface on which the DHCP client message was received.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with the DHCP client that sent the message. This is the

key to the binding database.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the client interface.

IP Address The IP address assigned to the client by the DHCP server.

Lease Time The remaining IP address lease time for the client.

The following table describes the dynamic bindings information.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual82

Configure the DHCP Snooping Persistent Settings

You can configure the persistent location of the DHCP snooping bindings database. The

bindings database can be stored locally on the device.

To configure DHCP snooping persistent settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Persistent Configuration.

The DHCP Snooping Persistent Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Local radio button.

The binding table is stored locally on the switch. By default, the Disable radio button is

selected.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Set Up PoE Timer Schedules

Note: This section applies to model MS510TXPP only.

The switch lets you define multiple timer schedules that you can use for PoE power delivery

to attached powered devices (PDs).

After you create a timer schedule, you can associate it with one or more PoE ports (see

Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration on page 57). You can use a separate timer

schedule for each PoE port.

After you associate a timer schedule with a PoE port, the start date and time force the PoE

port to stop delivering power and the stop date and time enable the PoE port to start

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual83

delivering power. That is, when a timer schedule is active, PoE is disabled on the port. When

the timer schedule is inactive, PoE is enabled on the port.

Note: Timer schedules can function only if the switch clock was set, either

manually or by SNTP (see Configure the Time Settings on page 34).

If the switch clock is set to the default clock, timer schedules do not

take effect.

You can create absolute schedules, which apply to specific dates and times, and you can

create recurring schedules.

From the System > Timer Schedule menu, you can access pages that are described in the

following sections:

•Create a PoE Timer Schedule on page 83

•Specify the Settings for a PoE Timer Schedule on page 84

•Add a Periodic Schedule for a PoE Timer Schedule on page 85

•Delete a Periodic Schedule for a PoE Timer Schedule on page 86

•Delete a PoE Timer Schedule on page 87

Create a PoE Timer Schedule

The maximum number of timer schedules that you can add is 100.

To create a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Name page displays.

6. In the Timer Schedule Name field, specify the name for a timer schedule.

7. Click the Add button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual84

The timer schedule is added to the table on the Timer Schedule Name page.

Specify the Settings for a PoE Timer Schedule

A PoE timer schedule can start either immediately or at a specific time on a specific date.

Similarly, a PoE timer schedule can continue indefinitely (or until you change the settings) or

end at a specific time on a specific date.

For each PoE timer schedule, you can add multiple periodic schedules that are repeated

every week while the PoE timer schedule is active (see Add a Periodic Schedule for a PoE

Timer Schedule on page 85) and that complement the PoE timer schedule.

To specify the settings for a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

6. From the Timer Schedule Name menu, select the name of the timer schedule for which you

want to add a periodic schedule.

You can select only names of schedules that you created (see Create a PoE Timer

Schedule on page 83).

7. Click the Add button.

If you select the Immediate radio button, the timer schedule is enabled immediately after you

complete the configuration for the timer schedule. You do not need to specify the date and

time that the timer schedule starts.

If you select the Specific radio button, specify the date and time that the timer schedule

starts by doing the following:

a. Click in the Timer Schedule Absolute Start Date field to display a calendar and

select the start date from the calendar.

b. In the Timer Schedule Absolute Start Time field, enter the start time in the hh:mm

24-hour format.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual85

8. Select the Timer Schedule Absolute End Permanent or Specific radio button.

If you select the Permanent radio button, the timer schedule continues indefinitely (or until

you change the settings) after you complete the configuration for the timer schedule. You do

not need to specify the date and time that the timer schedule ends.

If you select the Specific radio button, specify the date and time that the timer schedule

ends by doing the following:

a. Click in the Timer Schedule Absolute End Date field to display a calendar and

select the end date from the calendar.

b. In the Timer Schedule Absolute End Time field, enter the end time in the hh:mm

24-hour format.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

For information about associating the PoE timer schedule with one or more PoE ports,

see Manage and View the PoE Port Configuration on page 57.

Add a Periodic Schedule for a PoE Timer Schedule

For each PoE timer schedule, you can add multiple periodic schedules that are repeated

every week while the PoE timer schedule is active. For each entry, you can specify the days

of the week and the start and end time that applies to all selected days.

A periodic timer schedule complements the PoE timer schedule. If you do not add a periodic

timer schedule, the PoE timer schedule is active continuously after you enable it.

To add a periodic schedule for a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

6. From the Timer Schedule Name menu, select the name of the timer schedule that you

want to configure.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual86

You can select only names of schedules that you created (see Create a PoE Timer

Schedule on page 83).

7. Select the check boxes for the days on which the PoE timer schedule must be active.

8. In the Start Time field, enter the start time in the hh:mm 24-hour format.

The start time applies to all selected days.

9. In the End Time field, enter the end time in the hh:mm 24-hour format.

The end time applies to all selected days.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

11. Select System> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays. The timer schedule that you just added

displays in the Periodic Schedule Table.

Delete a Periodic Schedule for a PoE Timer Schedule

You can delete a periodic schedule entry that you no longer need for a PoE timer schedule.

To delete a periodic schedule for a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

6. In the Periodic Schedule Table, select the check box for the periodic schedule that you want

to delete.

7. Click the Delete button.

The period schedule is deleted.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure System Information User Manual87

Delete a PoE Timer Schedule

You can delete a PoE timer schedule that you no longer need. All periodic schedules that are

part of the PoE timer schedule are also deleted.

To delete a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Name page displays.

6. Select the check box for the schedule that you want to delete.

7. Click the Delete button.

The schedule is deleted.

3Configure Switching

This chapter covers the following topics:

•Configure Port Settings and Flow Control

•Configure Link Aggregation Groups

•Configure VLANs

•Configure a Voice VLAN

•Configure Auto-VoIP

•Configure Spanning Tree Protocol

•Configure Multicast

•View, Search, and Manage the MAC Address Table

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual89

Configure Port Settings and Flow Control

You can configure global flow control for all ports and view, configure, and monitor the port

information for individual ports.

From the Switching > Ports menu, you can access pages that are described in the following

sections:

•Configure IEEE 802.3x Global Flow Control on page 89

•Configure the Port Settings on page 90

Configure IEEE 802.3x Global Flow Control

Flow control helps to prevent data loss when the port cannot keep up with the number of

frames being switched. When flow control is enabled, the switch can send a pause frame to

stop traffic on a port if the amount of memory used by the packets on the port exceeds a

preconfigured threshold and responds to pause requests from partner devices.

The paused port does not forward packets for the period of time specified in the pause frame.

When the pause frame time elapses, or the utilization returns to a specified low threshold, the

switch enables the port to again transmit frames.

To configure port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Ports > Global Configuration.

The Global Configuration page displays.

6. Next to Global Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) Mode, enable or disable IEEE 802.3x flow control

on the system:

• Enable. The switch sends pause packets if the port buffers become full. That is, flow

control is enabled.

• Disable. The switch does not send pause packets if the port buffers become full. That

is, flow control is disabled. This the default setting.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual90

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the Port Settings

You can view, configure, and monitor the physical port information for the ports (that is, the

physical interfaces) on the switch.

To configure port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Ports > Port Configuration.

The Port Configuration pager displays.

6. Select one or more ports by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single port, select the check box associated with the port, or type the

port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple ports with the same settings, select the check box associated

with each port.

•To configure all ports with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.

7. In the Description field, enter the description for the port.

The description can be up to 64 characters in length.

8. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

This sets the port control administrative mode. You must select Enable in order for the

port to participate in the network. The default is Enable.

9. In the Port Speed field, specify the speed value for the selected port.

The supported speeds depends on the interface:

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual91

• Ports g1-g4. Support the setting of 10 Mbps half duplex, 10 Mbps full duplex, 100

Mbps half duplex, 100 Mbps full duplex (FD), and Auto. When set to Auto, the port

advertises 10/100 Mbps half and full duplex and 1000 Mbps full duplex.

• Ports mg5-mg6. Support the setting of 100 Mbps FD, 1 Gbps FD, and Auto. When

set to Auto, the port advertises 100 Mbps FD, 1000 Mbps FD, and 2.5 Gbps FD.

• Ports mg7-mg8. Support the setting of 100 Mbps full duplex, 1Gbps FD, 2.5Gbps

FD, and Auto. When set to Auto, the port advertises 100 Mbps FD, 1 Gbps FD, 2.5

Gbps FD, and 5 Gbps FD.

• Port xmg9. Supports the setting of 100 Mbps FD, 1 Gbps FD, 2.5 Gbps FD, 5 Gbps

FD, and Auto. When set to Auto, the port advertises 100 Mbps FD, 1 Gbps FD,

2.5 Gbps FD, 5 Gbps FD, and 10 Gbps FD.

• Port xg10. Supports the setting of 1 Gbps FD and Auto.

Note: If you select multiple ports, the available options are determined by the

common capabilities for the selected interfaces.

Note: After you change the speed, the switch might be inaccessible for a

number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 20. Port Configuration information

Field Description

Port Type For normal ports this field is blank. Otherwise, the possible values are as follows:

• Mirrored. The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic is copied to the probe port.

• Probe. Use this port to monitor a mirrored port.

• LAG. The port is a member of a link aggregation trunk. For more information, see

Configure Link Aggregation Groups on page 91.

Physical Status The port speed and duplex mode.

Link Status Indicates whether the link is up or down. If the link is down because of a of switch action

rather than the configured settings or a physical status, a reason is also provided.

MAC Address The physical address of the specified interface.

ifIndex The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port.

Configure Link Aggregation Groups

Link aggregation groups (LAGs), which are also known as port channels, allow you to

combine multiple full-duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the

aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual92

sharing. You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG. The LAG by default

becomes a member of the default management VLAN (that is, VLAN 1).

A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a LAG must

participate in the same protocols. A static port channel interface does not require a partner

system to be able to aggregate its member ports.

Static LAGs are supported. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, it neither

transmits nor receives LACPDUs. The switch supports 8 LAGs.

From the Switching > LAG > Advanced menu, you can access pages that are described in

the following sections:

•Configure LAG Settings on page 92

•Configure LAG Membership on page 94

•Set the LACP System Priority on page 95

•Set the LACP Port Priority Settings on page 95

Configure LAG Settings

Use the LAG Configuration page to group one or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be

aggregated together to form a link aggregation group, which is also known as a port channel.

The switch treats the LAG as if it were a single link.

Only interfaces of the same type as the other interfaces in the LAG can be added to a LAG.

Therefore, only the following port groups can be members in the same LAG: g1 to g4 (a 1G

LAG) or ports mg5 to mg6 (2.5G LAG), or ports mg5 to mg6 (5G LAG) or ports xmg9 and

xg10 (10G LAG).

To configure LAG settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Basic > LAG Configuration.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual93

6. Select one or more LAGs by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single LAG, select the check box associated with the LAG.

•To configure multiple LAGs with the same settings, select the check box associated

with each LAG.

•To configure all LAGs with the same settings, select the check box in the heading row.

7. In the LAG Name field, enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be

specified for you to create the LAG.

8. In the Description field, enter the description string to be attached to a LAG.

The description can be up to 64 characters in length.

9. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that

form the LAG are not released. The default is Enable.

10. From the STP Mode menu, select the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) administrative mode

associated with the LAG. The possible values are as follows:

• Disable. Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.

• Enable. Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.

11. From the LAG Type menu, select Static or LACP:

• Static. Disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the selected LAG. The

LAG is configured manually. The default is Static.

A static LAG does not transmit LACP PDUs or process incoming LACP PDUs. That

is, the member ports of a LAG do not transmit LACP PDUs and all incoming LACP

PDUs are dropped.

• LACP. Disables LACP on the selected LA. The LAG is configured automatically.

Note: You can change the LAG type only if the LAG includes members and

the LAG is up.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual94

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure LAG Membership

You can select two or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group (LAG), which is also known as a port channel. The switch can treat the

port channel as a single link.

Interfaces that you add to a LAG must be of the same type. Therefore, only the following port

groups can be members in the same LAG: g1–g4 for a 1G LAG), ports mg5 and mg6 for

either a 2.5G LAG or a 5G LAG, and ports xmg9 and xg9 for a 10G LAG.

To configure LAG membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Basic > LAG Membership.

The LAG Membership page displays.

6. From the LAG ID menu, select the LAG ID.

The LAG Name field shows the name that is assigned to the LAG. You cannot change this

name. The names are ch1, ch2, and so on through ch8.

7. To display the ports that are members of a LAG, click the Current members button.

A pop-up window opens and shows the ports that are members of the LAG, if any.

8. In the Ports table, click each port that you want to include as a member of the selected

LAG.

Table 21. LAG Configuration information

Field Description

LAG ID Identification of the LAG.

Active Ports Indicates the ports that are actively participating in the port channel.

LAG State Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual95

A selected port is displayed by a check mark.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Set the LACP System Priority

The LACP configuration page is used to set the LACP system priority.

To configure LACP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Advanced > LACP Configuration.

The LACP Configuration page displays.

6. In the LACP System Priority field, specify the device’s link aggregation priority relative to

the devices at the other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled.

A higher value indicates a lower priority. You can change the value of the parameter

globally by specifying a priority from 1 to 65535. The default value is 1.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Set the LACP Port Priority Settings

The LACP port configuration page is used to configure the LACP priority value for the selected

port and the administrative LACP time-out value.

To configure LACP port priority settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual96

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Advanced > LACP Port Configuration.

The LACP Port Configuration page displays.

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. In the LACP Priority field, specify the LACP priority value for the selected interfaces.

This value specifies the device’s link aggregation priority relative to the devices at the

other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled. A higher value indicates a

lower priority. The range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 128.

8. In the Timeout field, configure the administrative LACP time-out value:

• Long. Specifies a long time-out value.

• Short. Specifies a short time-out value.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure VLANs

Adding virtual LAN (VLAN) support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both

bridging and routing. Like a bridge, a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2

header, which is fast, and like a router, it partitions the network into logical segments, which

provides better administration, security, and management of multicast traffic.

By default, all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain. VLANs electronically

separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast

packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch. When you use a VLAN, users can be

grouped by logical function instead of physical location.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual97

Each VLAN in a network is assigned an associated VLAN ID, which appears in the IEEE

802.1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN. An end station can omit

the tag, or the VLAN portion of the tag, in which case the first switch port to receive the

packet can either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID. A given port can handle

traffic for more than one VLAN, but it can support only one default VLAN ID.

You can define VLAN groups that are placed in the VLAN membership table. The switch

supports up to 256 VLANs (with a VLAN ID from 1–4093). VLAN 1 is the default VLAN of

which all ports are members.

From the Switching > VLAN > Advanced menu, you can access pages that are described

in the following sections:

•Configure VLAN Settings on page 97

•Configure VLAN Membership on page 99

•View VLAN Status on page 101

•Configure Port PVID Settings on page 102

•Configure MAC-Based VLAN Groups on page 104

•Manually Add Members to or Remove Them From a MAC-Based VLAN Group on

page 106

•Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups on page 106

•Manually Add Members to or Remove Them From a Protocol-Based VLAN Group on

page 108

•Configure GARP Switch Settings on page 109

•Configure GARP Ports on page 110

Configure VLAN Settings

Add a VLAN

To add a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual98

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays. The page also shows the Reset section.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN identifier for the new VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID can be from 2 to 4093. VLAN ID 1 is reserved for the default

VLAN.

7. In the VLAN Name field, specify a name for the VLAN.

The VLAN name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The

default is blank. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name Default.

8. The VLAN Type field displays the type of the VLAN that you are configuring.

You cannot change the type of the default VLAN (VLAN ID = 1): it is always type Default.

When you create a VLAN using this page, its type is always Static. A VLAN that is created

by GVRP registration initially uses a type of Dynamic. When configuring a dynamic

VLAN, you can change its type to Static.

9. Click the Add button.

The VLAN is added to the switch.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete a VLAN

To delete a VLAN from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN identifier.

The range of the VLAN ID can be from 1 to 4093.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual99

Note: You cannot delete VLAN 1, which is the default VLAN.

7. Click the Delete button.

The VLAN is removed.

Reset All VLANs to the Default Settings

To reset all VLANs to the default settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Reset Configuration check box.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The default values are as follows:

•All ports are assigned to default VLAN 1.

•All ports are configured with PVID 1.

All VLANs, except for the default VLAN, are deleted.

Configure VLAN Membership

To configure VLAN membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual100

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Membership.

6. In the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

7. In the Group Operation menu, select one of the following options, which applies to all ports

in the VLAN:

• Tag All. For all ports that are members of the VLAN, all egress packets are tagged.

• Untag All. For all ports that are members of the VLAN, tags are removed from all

egress packets.

• Remove All. All ports that were dynamically registered through GVRP are removed

from the VLAN.

8. In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the port to the default settings:

• T (Tagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.

The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• U (Untagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is excluded from the VLAN

but can be dynamically registered (autodetected) in the VLAN through GVRP.

9. In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the LAG to the default settings:

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual101

• T (Tagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

tagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• U (Untagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is excluded from the VLAN

but can be dynamically registered (autodetected) in the VLAN through GVRP.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 22. Advanced VLAN membership

Field Definition

VLAN Name The name for the VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric

characters long, including blanks. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name

Default.

VLAN Type The type of the VLAN you selected:

• Default. The management VLAN is created automatically. By default,

this is VLAN 1.

• Static. A VLAN that you configured.

• Dynamic. A VLAN created by GVRP registration that you did not

convert to static, and that GVRP can therefore remove.

View VLAN Status

You can view the status of all currently configured VLANs.

To view the VLAN status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Status.

The VLAN Status page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual102

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 23. VLAN status

Field Definition

VLAN ID The VLAN identifier (VID) of the VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to

4093.

VLAN Name The name of the VLAN. VLAN ID 1 is always named Default.

VLAN Type The VLAN type:

• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present.

• Static. A VLAN that you configured.

• Dynamic. A VLAN created by GVRP registration that you did not

convert to static, and that GVRP can therefore remove.

Routing Interface The interface associated with the VLAN, in the case that VLAN routing is

configured for this VLAN.

Member Ports The ports and LAGs that are included in the VLAN.

Configure Port PVID Settings

You can assign a port VLAN ID (PVID) to an interface. The following requirements apply to a

PVID:

•You must define a PVID for all ports.

•If no other value is specified, the default VLAN PVID is used.

•To change the port’s default PVID, you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as

a member.

•Use the Port VLAN ID (PVID) Configuration page to configure a virtual LAN on a port.

To configure PVID settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Port PVID Configuration.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual103

The Port PVID Configuration page displays.

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Do one of the following:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. In the PVID field, specify the VLAN ID to assign to untagged or priority-tagged frames

received on this port.

The default is 1.

9. In the VLAN Member field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a member port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. The default is 1. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a

comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted.

10. In the VLAN Tag field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a tagged port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to

separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted. To reset the VLAN tag

configuration to the defaults, select None. Port tagging for the VLAN can be set only if the

port is a member of this VLAN.

11. From the Acceptable Frame menu, specify the types of frames that can be received on this

port.

The options are VLAN only and Admit All:

• VLAN only. Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port are

discarded.

• Admit All. Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port are

accepted and assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for this port. With either option,

VLAN-tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specification.

12. From the Ingress Filtering menu, select one of the following options:

• Enable. The frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which

this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in

the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the port VLAN ID specified for the port that

received this frame. The default is Enable.

• Disable. All frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge

specification.

13. In the Port Priority field, specify the default 802.1p priority assigned to untagged packets

arriving at the port.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual104

You can enter a number from 0 to 7.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure MAC-Based VLAN Groups

The MAC-Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN

and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet.

You define a MAC-to-VLAN mapping by configuring an entry in the MAC-to-VLAN table. An

entry is specified through a source MAC address and the desired VLAN ID. The

MAC-to-VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device (that is, a system-wide

table exists with MAC address–to–VLAN ID mappings).

When untagged or priority-tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the

MAC-to-VLAN table, the source MAC address of the packet is looked up. If an entry is found,

the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. If the packet is already priority tagged

it maintains this value. Otherwise, the priority is set to zero. The assigned VLAN ID is verified

against the VLAN table. If the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues.

Otherwise, the packet is dropped. This implies that the user is allowed to configure a MAC

address mapping to a VLAN that was not created on the system.

Add a MAC-Based VLAN Group

To add a MAC-based VLAN group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN Group Configuration.

The MAC Based VLAN Group Configuration page displays. The page also shows the

MAC Based VLAN Mapping section.

6. In the MAC Address field, enter a valid MAC address to be bound to a VLAN ID.

This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN is created.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual105

7. In the Prefix Mask field, enter a value from 9 to 48.

8. In the Group ID field, specify a group ID that allows you to identify the group.

9. Click the Add button.

The MAC address is added to the MAC-based VLAN group.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Delete a MAC-Based VLAN Group

To delete a MAC-based VLAN group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN Group Configuration.

The MAC Based VLAN Group Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the group that you want to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The MAC-based VLAN group is removed.

Table 24. MAC Based VLAN Mapping

Field Definition

Group ID The ID of the group.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID that is associated with the group.

Ports The ports that are assigned to the VLAN as a result of MAC-based VLAN

mapping.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual106

Manually Add Members to or Remove Them From a

MAC-Based

VLAN Group

To add members to or remove them from a MAC-based VLAN group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN Group Membership.

The MAC Based VLAN Group Membership page displays.

6. In the Group ID menu, select the group ID.

7. In the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

8. In the Ports table, click the port once to add it to the VLAN for the group or twice to remove

it from the VLAN for the group.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is excluded from the VLAN

for the group.

9. In the LAG table, click the LAG once to add it to the VLAN for the group or twice to remove

it from the VLAN for the group.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is excluded from the VLAN

for the group.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups

You can use a protocol-based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets. By

default, if you do not configure any port-based (IEEE 802.1Q) or protocol-based VLANs,

untagged packets are assigned to VLAN 1. You can override this behavior by defining either

port-based VLANs or protocol-based VLANs, or both. Tagged packets are always handled

according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard and are not included in protocol-based VLANs.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual107

If you assign a port to a protocol-based VLAN for a specific protocol, untagged frames

received on that port for that protocol are assigned the protocol-based VLAN ID. Untagged

frames received on the port for other protocols are assigned the port VLAN ID, either the

default PVID (1) or a PVID you specifically assigned to the port using the Port VLAN

Configuration page.

You define a protocol-based VLAN by creating a group. Each group forms a one-to-one

relationship with a VLAN ID, can include one to three protocol definitions, and can include

multiple ports. When you create a group, you specify a group ID.

To configure a protocol-based VLAN group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration.

The Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration page displays. The page also shows the

Protocol Based VLAN Mapping section.

6. In the Group ID field, specify a group ID that allows you to identify the group.

7. In the Protocol field, enter one or more protocols that must be associated with the group.

You can enter the ARP, IP, and IPX keywords. Separate keywords with a comma. Although

you cannot enter other keywords, you can enter hexadecimal or decimal values in the

range of 0x0600 (1536) to 0xFFFF (65535).

8. Click the Add button.

The protocol-based VLAN group is added to the switch.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual108

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Delete a Protocol-Based VLAN Group

To delete a protocol-based VLAN group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration.

The Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the group that you want to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The protocol-based VLAN group is removed.

Manually Add Members to or Remove Them From a

Protocol-Based VLAN Group

To add members to or remove them from a protocol-based VLAN group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Table 25. Protocol Based VLAN Mapping

Field Definition

Group ID The ID of the group.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID that is associated with the group.

Ports The ports that are assigned to the VLAN as a result of protocol-based

VLAN mapping.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual109

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership.

The Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership page displays.

6. In the Group ID menu, select the group ID.

7. In the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

8. In the Ports table, click the port once to add it to the VLAN for the group or twice to remove

it from the VLAN for the group.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is excluded from the VLAN

for the group.

9. In the LAG table, click the LAG once to add it to the VLAN for the group or twice to remove

it from the VLAN for the group.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is excluded from the VLAN

for the group.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure GARP Switch Settings

The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) is used to exchange information

between GARP participants to register and deregister attribute values within a bridged LAN.

When a GARP participant declares or withdraws a given attribute, the attribute value is

recorded with the applicant state machine for that attribute, for the port from which the

declaration or withdrawal was made.

•Registration occurs only on ports that receive the GARP PDU containing a declaration or

withdrawal.

•Deregistration occurs only if all GARP participants connected to the same LAN segment

as the port withdraw the declaration.

GARP is part of the IEEE 802.1p extension to its 802.1D (spanning tree) specification. It

includes the following:

• GARP Information Declaration (GID). The part of GARP that generates data.

• GARP Information Propagation (GIP). The part of GARP that distributes data.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual110

Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take

effect.

To configure GARP switch settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > GARP Switch Configuration.

The GARP Switch Configuration page displays.

6. Select the GVRP Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This selects the GARP VLAN registration protocol administrative mode for the switch.

The default is Disable.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure GARP Ports

Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take

effect.

To configure GARP ports:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual111

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > GARP Port Configuration.

The GARP Port Configuration page displays.

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the GVRP State menu, select Enable or Disable.

This specifies the GARP VLAN registration protocol administrative mode for the port. If

you select Disable, the protocol is not active and the join time, leave time, and leave all

time options are without any effect. The default is Disable.

9. In the Join Timer field, specify the time in centiseconds between the transmission of GARP

PDUs registering (or reregistering) membership for a VLAN or multicast group.

Enter a number between 10 and 100 (0.1 to 1.0 seconds). The default is 20 centiseconds

(0.2 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port.

10. In the Leave Timer field, specify the time in centiseconds to wait after receiving an

unregister request for a VLAN or multicast group before deleting the associated entry.

This allows time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute to

maintain uninterrupted service. Enter a number between 20 and 600 (0.2 to 6.0 seconds).

The default is 60 centiseconds (0.6 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each

GARP participant for each port.

11. In the Leave All Timer field, specify how frequently (in centiseconds) LeaveAll PDUs are

generated.

A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will be deregistered soon. To maintain

registration, participants must rejoin. The leave all period timer is set to a random value in

the range of LeaveAllTime to 1.5 x LeaveAllTime. The timer is specified in centiseconds.

Enter a number between 200 and 6000 (2 to 60 seconds). The default is 1000

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual112

centiseconds (10 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for

each port.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a Voice VLAN

You can configure the global settings for a voice VLAN and enable or disable the voice VLAN

for specific ports and LAGs that carry traffic from IP phones.

The voice VLAN feature can help ensure that the sound quality of an IP phone is

safeguarded from deteriorating when the data traffic on the port is high.

The following are two operational modes for IP phones:

•IP phones are configured with VLAN mode enabled, ensuring that the phone uses tagged

packets for all communications.

•IP phones are configured with VLAN mode disabled, ensuring that the phone uses

untagged packets for all communications. The phone uses untagged packets while

retrieving the initial IP address through DHCP. The phone eventually uses the voice

VLAN and commences sending tagged packets.

From the Switching > Voice VLAN > Advanced menu, you can access pages that are

described in the following sections:

•Configure the Global Voice VLAN Settings on page 112

•Configure Membership for the Voice VLAN on page 113

•Configure the Global Voice VLAN Settings on page 112

Configure the Global Voice VLAN Settings

To configure the global voice VLAN settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual113

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Voice VLAN > Properties.

The Properties page displays.

6. Select the Voice VLAN Status Enable radio button.

This enables the administrative mode for the voice VLAN for the switch. The default is

Disable.

7. In the Voice VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN that must be the voice VLAN.

VLAN 1, the default VLAN, cannot be the voice VLAN.

8. In the Class Of Service menu, select the CoS tag value from 0 to 7 that must be

reassigned for packets that are received on the voice VLAN when Remark CoS is enabled.

The default value is 6.

9. To enable Class of Service remarking on the ports and LAGs that are members of the voice

VLAN, select the Remark CoS Enable radio button.

By default, Remark CoS is disabled.

10. In the Voice VLAN Aging Time fields, specify the time after which the last IP phone’s OUI

must expire for the ports and LAGs that are members of the voice VLAN.

By default, the OUI expires after 1 day.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Membership for the Voice VLAN

To add or remove interfaces from the voice VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Voice VLAN > Advanced > Port Setting.

The Port Settings page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual114

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Voice VLAN Mode menu, select one of the following options:

• Enable. Adds the selected interfaces to the voice VLAN.

• Disable. Removes the selected interfaces from the voice VLAN. The default is

Disable.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Membership field displays whether the current operational status of the voice VLAN

on the interface is active or not.

Manage the OUI Table

Device hardware manufacturers can include an OUI in a network adapter to help identify a

hardware device. The OUI is a unique 24-bit number assigned by the IEEE registration

authority. The switch comes preconfigured with the following OUIs that identify the IP phone

manufacturer:

•00:01:E3: SIEMENS

•00:03:6B: CISCO1

•00:04:0D: AVAYA1

•00:12:43: CISCO2

•00:1B:4F: AVAYA2

•00:60:B9: NITSUKO

•00:D0:1E: PINTEL

•00:E0:75: VERILINK

•00:E0:BB: 3COM

You can select an existing OUI or add a new OUI and description to identify the IP phones on

the network.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual115

Add VoIP OUI Prefixes

To add VoIP OUI prefixes to the OUI table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Voice VLAN > Advanced > OUI.

The OUI page displays.

6. In the Telephony OUI(s) field, specify the VoIP OUI prefix to be added in the format

AA:BB:CC.

7. In the Description field, enter the description for the OUI.

The maximum length of description is 32 characters.

8. Click the Add button.

The telephony OUI entry is added.

Delete One or More OUI Prefixes From the OUI Table

To delete one or more OUI prefixes from the OUI table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Voice VLAN > Advanced > OUI.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual116

The OUI page displays.

6. Select the check box for each OUI prefix to be removed.

7. Click the Delete button.

The telephony OUI entries are removed.

Configure Auto-VoIP

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) enables telephone calls over a data network. Because

voice traffic is typically more time-sensitive than data traffic, the Auto-VoIP feature helps to

provide a classification mechanism for voice packets so that they can be prioritized above

data packets in order to provide better Quality of Service (QoS). With the Auto-VoIP feature,

voice prioritization is provided based on call-control protocols (SIP, SCCP, H.323) or OUI bits.

To prioritize time-sensitive voice traffic over data traffic, protocol-based Auto-VoIP checks for

packets carrying the following VoIP protocols:

•Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

•H.323

•Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP)

All three protocols are checked during the signaling and call identification stage. Once the

VoIP call is established, only the SIP and SCCP protocols are checked. This feature supports

up to 48 bidirectional VoIP calls.

VoIP frames that are received on ports for which the Auto-VoIP feature is enabled are

assigned to queue 6.

The Auto-VoIP, QoS CoS, and QoS DiffServ features can coexist and be activated at the

same time. If these features are active at the same time on the same port, the manual QoS

assignment might override the VoIP QoS assignment.

To configure Auto-VoIP on interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual117

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Auto-VoIP.

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Auto-VoIP Mode menu, select one of the following options:

• Enable. Enables Auto-VoIP on the selected interfaces.

• Disable. Disables Auto-VoIP on the selected interfaces. The default is Disable.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Traffic Class fields show 6, which is the default queue to which the interfaces are

assigned.

Configure Spanning Tree Protocol

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides a tree topology for any arrangement of bridges.

STP also provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops. Spanning

tree versions supported include Common STP, Multiple STP, and Rapid STP.

Classic STP provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops. For

information on configuring Common STP, see Configure CST Port Settings on page 122.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) supports multiple instances of spanning tree to

efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces. Each instance of the spanning tree

behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP), with slight

modifications in the working but not the end effect (chief among the effects is the rapid

transitioning of the port to the forwarding state). The difference between the RSTP and the

traditional STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity

and ports that are connected to end stations, resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to the

forwarding state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification. These features are

represented by the parameters pointtopoint and edgeport. MSTP is compatible with both

RSTP and STP. It behaves in a way that is appropriate for STP and RSTP bridges. An MSTP

bridge can be configured to behave entirely as an RSTP bridge or an STP bridge.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual118

Note: For two bridges to be in the same region, the force version must be

802.1s and their configuration names, digest keys, and revision levels

must match. For additional information about regions and their effect

on network topology, refer to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

From the Switching > STP > Advanced menu, you can access pages that are described in

the following sections:

•Configure STP Settings on page 118

•Configure CST Settings on page 120

•Configure CST Port Settings on page 122

•View the CST Port Status on page 123

•View Rapid STP Information on page 124

•Manage MST Settings on page 125

•Configure MST Port Settings on page 128

•View STP Statistics on page 130

Configure STP Settings

The STP Configuration page contains fields for enabling STP on the switch.

To configure STP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Basic > STP Configuration.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual119

6. Configure the following settings:

• Spanning Tree State. Enable or disable the spanning tree operation on the switch.

• STP Operation Mode. Specify the STP version for the switch. The options are STP,

RSTP, and MSTP.

• Configuration Name. Specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently

being used. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

• Configuration Revision Level. Specify an identifier used to identify the configuration

currently being used. The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value

is 0.

• Forward BPDU while STP Disabled. Enable or disable the BPDU Flood. This setting

specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded or not while spanning tree is

disabled on the switch.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual120

The following table describes the nonconfigurable STP Status fields displayed on the page.

Table 26. STP Status

Field Description

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and

the base MAC address of the bridge.

Time Since Topology Change The time in day-hour-minute-second format since the topology of the CST

last changed.

Topology Change Count The number of times that the topology changed for the CST.

Topology Change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating

whether a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST.

Possible values are True and False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority

and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Root Path Cost Path cost to the designated root for the CST.

Root Port Port to access the designated root for the CST.

Max Age (Secs) The maximum age timer controls the maximum length of time in seconds

that passes before a bridge port saves its configuration BPDU information.

Forward Delay (Secs) The derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay parameter.

Hello Time (Secs) Minimum time in seconds between the transmission of configuration

BPDUs.

CST Regional Root Priority and base MAC address of the CST regional root.

CST Path Cost Path cost to the CST tree regional root.

Configure CST Settings

Use the CST Configuration page to configure Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal

Spanning Tree on the switch.

To configure CST settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual121

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Configuration.

The CST Configuration page displays. The page also shows the MSTP Status section.

6. Specify the CST options:

• Bridge Priority. When switches or bridges are running STP

, each is assigned a

priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes

the root bridge. Specify the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST). The valid range is 0–61440. The bridge priority is a multiple of

4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically

set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if you set the

priority to any value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets the value to 0.

The default value is 32768.

• Bridge Max Age (secs). The bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a bridge must wait before

implementing a topological change. The valid range is 6–40, and the value must be

less than or equal to (2 * Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater than or equal to 2 *

(Bridge Hello Time +1). The default value is 20.

• Bridge Hello Time (secs). The bridge hello time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a root bridge must wait

between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2 seconds. The value must be

less than or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) – 1. The default hello time value is 2.

• Bridge Forward Delay (secs). The bridge forward delay time, which indicates the

time in seconds a bridge must remains in a listening and learning state before

forwarding packets. The value must be greater or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1.

The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.

• Spanning Tree Maximum Hops. The maximum number of bridge hops the

information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded. The valid

range is 6–40. The default is 20 hops.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the MSTP Status information that is displayed.

Table 27. STP advanced CST configuration, MSTP status

Field Description

MST ID The ID of the MST instance (including the CST).

VID The VLAN IDs that are associated with the MST ID.

FID The filtering identifiers (FIDs) that are associated with the MST ID.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual122

Configure CST Port Settings

Use the CST Port Configuration page to configure Common Spanning Tree (CST) and

Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch.

To configure CST port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Configuration.

The Port Configuration page displays.

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the STP Status menu, select the option to enable or disable spanning tree

administrative mode associated with the port or port channel.

The possible values are Enable and Disable. The default value is Enable.

9. From the Fast Link menu, select whether the specified port is an edge port within the CST.

The possible values are Enable, Disable, and Auto. The default value is Auto, which

specifies that the switch waits three seconds (with no BPDUs received on the interface)

before placing the interface into the PortFast mode.

10. From the BPDU Forwarding menu, configure BPDU forwarding.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual123

The possible values are Enable and Disable. The default value is Disable. When BPDU

forwarding is enabled, the switch forwards the BPDU traffic arriving on this port when

STP is disabled on this port.

11. In the Path Cost field, set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the common

and internal spanning tree.

Specify a value in the range of 0 to 200000000. The default is 0. When the path cost is

set to 0, the value is updated with the external path cost from a received STP packet.

12. In the Priority field, specify the priority for a particular port within the CST.

The port priority is set in multiples of 16. The range is 0 to 240. The possible values are 0,

16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208, 224, or 240. The default value

is 128.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

14. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

View the CST Port Status

Use the Spanning Tree CST Port Status page to display Common Spanning Tree (CST) and

Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch.

To view the CST port status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

Table 28. CST port configuration

Field Description

Port State The forwarding state of this port (Forwarding or Disabled).

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the CST. The identifier is

made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Hello Timer The value of the parameter for the CST. The default is 2 seconds.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual124

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Status.

The CST Port Status page displays.

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the page.

Table 29. CST port status

Field Description

Interface Identify the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs

associated with the CST.

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning

tree. The port role is one of the following values: Root Port, Designated Port,

Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled Port.

Designated Root Root bridge for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base

MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost Path cost offered to the LAN by the designated port.

Designated Bridge Bridge identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using the

bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port Port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN. It is

made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Edge port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port. It is either Enabled or

Disabled.

Point-to-point MAC Derived value of the point-to-point status.

CST Regional Root Bridge identifier of the CST regional root. It is made up using the bridge priority

and the base MAC address of the bridge.

CST Path Cost Path cost to the CST regional root.

Port Forwarding State The forwarding state of the port.

View Rapid STP Information

Use the Rapid STP page to view information about Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) port status.

To view information about RSTP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual125

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > RSTP.

The Rapid STF page displays.

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the Rapid STP Status information displayed on the page.

Table 30. Rapid STP status information

Field Description

Interface The physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST.

Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning tree. The port

role is one of the following: Root Port, Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master

Port, or Disabled Port.

Mode Specifies the spanning tree operation mode. Different modes are STP

, RSTP, and MSTP.

Fast Link Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port.

Status The forwarding state of this port.

Manage MST Settings

Use the Spanning Tree MST Configuration page to configure Multiple Spanning Tree (MST)

on the switch.

Configure an MST Instance

To configure an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual126

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

6. Configure the MST values:

• MST ID. Specify the ID of the MST to create. The valid values for this are 1 to 15.

• Priority. The bridge priority value for the MST. When switches or bridges are running

STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest

priority value becomes the root bridge. The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096. The

valid range is 0–61440. The default value is 32768.

• VLAN ID. The menu includes all VLANs that are configured on the switch. You can

select VLANs that must be associated with the MST instance or clear VLANs that are

already associated with the MST instance.

7. Click the Add button.

The MST is added.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual127

For each configured instance, the information described in the following table displays on the

page.

Modify an MST Instance

To modify an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the instance.

You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports.

7. Update the values.

8. Click the Apply button.

Table 31. MST configuration

Field Description

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Time Since Topology

Change

The time since the topology of the selected MST instance last changed.

Topology Change Count The number of times that the topology changed for the selected MST instance.

Topology Change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology

change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected MST instance. It is

either True or False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and

the base MAC address of the bridge

Root Path Cost Path cost to the designated root for this MST instance.

Root Port Port to access the designated root for this MST instance.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual128

Your settings are saved.

Delete an MST Instance

To delete an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the instance.

7. Click the Delete button.

The MST instance is removed.

Configure MST Port Settings

Use the MST Port Configuration page to configure and display Multiple Spanning Tree (MST)

settings on a specific port on the switch.

To configure MST port settings and start the STP migration process for an MST

instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual129

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Port Configuration.

6. In the MST Select menu, select the MST instance.

7. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. Configure the MST values for the selected interfaces:

• Port Priority. Specify the priority for the interfaces. The port priority is set in multiples

of 16. The range is 0–240. The default setting is 128.

• Port Path Cost. Specify the path cost for the interfaces. The range is 0–200000000.

The default setting is 2000000. If you enter 0, the switch recalculates the path cost.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

11. To restart the STP migration process (that is, force renegotiation with neighboring switches

for the selected interfaces), click the Activate Protocol Migration button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual130

The following table describes the read-only MST port configuration information displayed on

the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page.

Table 32. MST port status information

Field Description

Auto Calculated Port Path

Cost

Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enabled) or not

(Disabled). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the

configured value for Port Path Cost is 0.

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance. It is

made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Port Mode Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode associated with the port or port

channel. Possible values are Enable or Disable.

Port Forwarding State Indicates the current STP state of a port. If enabled, the port state determines

what forwarding action is taken on traffic. Possible port states are as follows:

• Disabled. STP is currently disabled on the port. The port forwards traffic

while learning MAC addresses.

• Blocking. The port is currently blocked and cannot be used to forward

traffic or learn MAC addresses.

• Listening. The port is currently in the listening mode. The port cannot

forward traffic nor can it learn MAC addresses.

• Learning. The port is currently in the learning mode. The port cannot

forward traffic. However, it can learn new MAC addresses.

• Forwarding. The port is currently in the forwarding mode. The port can

forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning

tree. The port role is one of the following: Root, Designated, Alternate, Backup,

Master, or Disabled Port.

Designated Root Root bridge for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge priority

and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost Displays cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower

cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops.

Designated Bridge Bridge identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using the

bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port Port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN. It

is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

View STP Statistics

You can view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs)

transmitted and received on each port.

To view Spanning Tree statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual131

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Statistics.

The STP Statistics page displays.

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the information available about the STP Statistics page.

Configure Multicast

Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups for IPv4 multicast are

identified by class D addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Host

groups for IPv6 multicast are identified by the prefix ff00::/8.

When you limit multicast transmissions to only certain ports on the switch, traffic is not

forwarded to parts of the network where it is not needed.

From the Switching > Multicast menu, you can access pages that are described in the

following sections:

•View the MFDB Table on page 132

•View the MFDB Statistics on page 133

Table 33. STP Statistics

Field Description

Interface The physical port or LAG.

STP BPDUs Received The number of STP BPDUs received at the port or LAG.

STP BPDUs Transmitted The number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the port or LAG.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual132

•Configure Auto-Video on page 134

•IGMP Snooping Overview on page 135

•Configure the Global IGMP Snooping Settings on page 135

•View the IGMP Snooping Table on page 137

•Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs on page 138

•Modify IGMP Snooping Settings for a VLAN on page 139

•Disable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN and Remove It From the Table on page 139

•IGMP Snooping Querier Overview on page 140

•Configure IGMP Snooping Querier on page 140

•Configure IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs on page 141

•Display the IGMP Snooping Querier for VLAN Status on page 142

•MLD Snooping Overview on page 143

•Configure the Global MLD Snooping Settings on page 144

•Configure MLD Snooping for a VLAN on page 144

•Configure a Multicast Router Interface on a VLAN on page 146

•Configure MLD Snooping Querier on page 147

•Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings on page 148

•Configure a Multicast Group on page 149

•Configure Multicast Group Membership on page 151

•Configure the Multicast Forward All Option on page 152

View the MFDB Table

The Layer 2 Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) holds the port membership information

for all active multicast address entries. The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and MAC

address pair. Entries can contain data for more than one protocol.

When the switch receives a packet with a destination multicast MAC address, this address is

combined with the VLAN ID, and the switch performs a search in the MFDB. If no match is

found, the packet is either flooded to all ports in the VLAN or discarded, depending on the

switch configuration. If a match is found, the packet is forwarded only to the ports that are

members of that multicast group per the specific VLAN ID.

To view the MFDB Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual133

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Table.

The MFDB Table page displays.

6. In the Search by MAC Address field, enter a MAC address.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example,

00:01:23:43:45:67.

7. Click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

The following table displays the MFDB table information.

Table 34. MFDB table information

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which you requested data.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related.

Component The component through which the entry was added to the Multicast Forwarding

Database. Possible values are IGMP Snooping, Static Filtering, and MLD Snooping.

Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user.

Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are Management

Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.

Interface The interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and filtering (Flt:) for the

selected address.

Forwarding Interfaces The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the forwarding interfaces

and removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces.

View the MFDB Statistics

To view the MFDB statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual134

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Statistics.

The MFDB Statistics page displays.

The following table describes the MFDB statistics fields.

Table 35. MFDB statistics information

Field Description

Max MFDB Table Entries The maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding Database

table can hold.

Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.

Configure Auto-Video

If the switch supports devices or applications running multicast traffic, the Auto-Video feature

simplifies IGMP snooping querier configuration, such as video surveillance cameras.

To configure auto-video settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > Auto-Video.

The Auto-Video Configuration page displays.

6. Select one of the following radio buttons:

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual135

•Select the Disable radio button to globally disable Auto-Video administrative mode

for the switch.

•Select the Enable radio button to globally enable Auto-Video administrative mode for

the switch.

7. If you enable the feature, from the Auto-Video VLAN menu, select the ID of the VLAN that

must become the Auto-Video VLAN.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

IGMP Snooping Overview

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is a feature that allows a switch to

forward multicast traffic intelligently on the switch. Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined

to a host group. Host groups are identified by class

D IP addresses, which range from

224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch

forwards traffic only to the ports that request the multicast traffic. This prevents the switch

from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance.

A traditional Ethernet network can be separated into different network segments to prevent

placing too many devices onto the same shared media. Bridges and switches connect these

segments. When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received, the

switch forwards a copy to each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the

IEEE MAC Bridge standard. Eventually, the packet is made accessible to all nodes

connected to the network.

This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be seen or processed by

all connected nodes. In the case of multicast packets, however, this approach could lead to

less efficient use of network bandwidth, particularly when the packet is intended for only a

small number of nodes. Packets are flooded into network segments where no node is

receptive to the packet. While nodes rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets

addressed to unrequested group addresses, they cannot transmit new packets onto the

shared media for the period of time that the multicast packet is flooded. The problem of

wasting bandwidth is even worse when the LAN segment is not shared, for example in

full-duplex links.

Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets is a creative effort to solve this problem. The

switch uses the information in the IGMP packets as they are being forwarded throughout the

network to determine which segments receive packets directed to the group address.

Configure the Global IGMP Snooping Settings

Before IGMP snooping can be enabled on specific VLANs (see Configure IGMP Snooping

for VLANs on page 138), you must configure the global settings.

To configure the global IGMP snooping settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual136

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping Configuration page displays. The page also shows the VLAN IDs

Enabled For IGMP Snooping section and the VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP Snooping

Querier section.

6. Next to IGMP Snooping Status, select whether IGMP snooping is enabled on the switch:

• Enable. The switch snoops all IGMP packets it receives to determine which segments

should receive packets directed to the group address.

• Disable. The switch does not snoop IGMP packets. This is the default setting.

7. Next to Block Unknown Multicast Addresses, select whether unknown multicast addresses

are blocked:

• Enable. Packets with unknown multicast MAC addresses in the destination field are

dropped.

• Disable. Packets with unknown destination multicast MAC addresses are flooded to

all interfaces in VLAN. This is the default setting.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

9. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status.

Table 36. IGMP snooping and IGMP snooping querier VLAN information

Field Description

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping

The VLANs on which IGMP snooping is enabled. For more information, see

Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs on page 138.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping Querier

The VLANs on which IGMP snooping querier is enabled. For more information,

see Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings on page 148.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual137

View the IGMP Snooping Table

Use the IGMP Snooping Table page to view all of the entries in the Multicast Forwarding

Database that were created for IGMP snooping.

To view the entries in the IGMP snooping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Table.

The IGMP Snooping Table page displays.

6. In the Search By MAC Address field, specify the MAC address whose MFDB table entry

you want to view.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example,

00:01:23:43:45:67.

7. Click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

The following table describes the information in the IGMP snooping table.

Table 37. IGMP Snooping Table information

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding information,

filtering information, or both. The format is six 2-digit hexadecimal numbers that

are separated by colons, for example, 01:00:5e:45:67:89.

VLAN ID The VLAN for which the switch holds forwarding and filtering information.

Type The type of the entry. Static entries were manually configured. Dynamic entries

were added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.

Description The text description for the multicast table entry. Possible values are

Management Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.

Interface The interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd) and filtering (Flt) for the

associated address.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual138

Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs

You can configure the parameters for IGMP snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists

for multicast traffic.

To configure IGMP snooping for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN.

7. From the Fast Leave Admin Mode menu, select whether IGMP snooping Fast Leave

mode is enabled.

Enabling Fast Leave mode lets the switch immediately remove the Layer 2 LAN

interfaces from its forwarding table entry upon receiving an IGMP leave message for that

multicast group without first sending MAC-based general queries to the interface.

We recommend that you enable fast leave admin mode only on VLANs for which only one

host is connected to a Layer 2 LAN port. This mode prevents the inadvertent dropping of

the other hosts that are connected to the same Layer 2 LAN port but are configured to

receive multicast traffic. Also, fast leave processing is supported only with IGMP version 2

hosts.

8. In the Max Response Time field, enter the period in seconds that the switch must wait after

it sends a query on the VLAN because it did not receive a report for a particular group. The

valid range is 5–20 seconds. The default value is 10.

9. From the Query Mode menu, select whether the IGMP querier mode is enabled.

10. In the Query Interval field, enter the value for the interval between IGMP queries. The valid

range is 30–1800 seconds. The default is 125 seconds.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual139

The following table displays nonconfigurable information about IGMP snooping for VLANs.

Modify IGMP Snooping Settings for a VLAN

To modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the VLAN ID.

7. Update the values.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Disable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN and Remove It From

the Table

To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN and remove it from the table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Table 38. IGMP VLAN snooping information

Field Description

Host Timeout The period that the switch must wait for a report for a particular group on a

particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

This value is calculated as follows: (Query Interval * 2) + Maximum Response

Time.

MRouter Timeout The period that the switch must wait after sending a query on an interface

because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface.

This value is calculated as follows: Query Interval * 2.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual140

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the VLAN ID.

7. Click the Delete button.

Snooping is disabled on the VLAN and the VLAN is removed from the table.

IGMP Snooping Querier Overview

IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end-devices

on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the IGMP

querier. The IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with

the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not

receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it stops forwarding multicasts to

the port where the end device is located.

You can configure and display information about IGMP snooping queriers on the network

and, separately, on VLANs.

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier

You can configure the parameters for IGMP snooping querier. Only a user with read/write

access privileges can change the data on this page.

To configure IGMP snooping querier settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual141

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier Configuration.

The Querier Configuration page displays. The page also shows the VLAN IDs Enabled

for IGMP Snooping Querier section.

6. Next to Querier Admin Mode, select whether the IGMP snooping querier is enabled on the

switch:

• Enable. The switch queries devices on the network for IGMP reports.

• Disable. The switch does not query devices on the network for IGMP reports. This is

the default setting.

7. Configure the following settings:

• Snooping Querier Address. Enter the snooping querier IP address to be used as

the source address in periodic IGMP queries. This address is used when no address

is configured on the VLAN on which a query is being sent.

• Query Interval (secs). Specify the interval in seconds between periodic queries sent

by the snooping querier. The query interval must be a value in the range of 30–1800.

The default value is 125.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table displays nonconfigurable information about the IGMP snooping querier.

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs

You can configure IGMP queriers for use with VLANs on the network.

To create a new VLAN ID for IGMP snooping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Table 39. IGMP snooping querier information

Field Description

IGMP Version The IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries.

Only ICMPv2 is supported.

Querier Expiry Interval The interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed. This

value is calculated as follows: 2 * Query Interval + 5, so by default the value is

2*125+5 = 255.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping Querier

The VLANs on which the IGMP snooping querier is enabled. For more

information, see Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings on

page 148.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual142

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Configuration.

The Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select New Entry.

7. Configure the following settings:

• VLAN ID. The VLAN ID for which the IGMP snooping querier is to be enabled.

• Querier Election Participate Mode. Enable or disable querier this mode:

- Disable. Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN, the

snooping querier moves to the non-querier state.

- Enable. The snooping querier participates in querier election, in which the lowest

IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

• Snooping Querier VLAN Address. Specify the snooping querier IP address to be

used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries sent on the specified VLAN.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Display the IGMP Snooping Querier for VLAN Status

To display querier VLAN status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual143

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Status.

The Querier VLAN Status page displays.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 40. Querier VLAN Status information

Field Description

VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which IGMP snooping querier is administratively enabled

and the VLAN exists in the VLAN database.

Operational State The operational state of the IGMP snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in

any of the following states:

• Enabled. The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The

snooping switch sends periodic queries with a time interval equal to the

configured querier query interval.

• Disabled. The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The

snooping querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP snooping is not

operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured

or the network management address is also not configured.

Operational Version The operational IGMP protocol version of the snooping querier.

Operational Max Response Time The maximum response time used in the queries that are sent by the

snooping querier.

MLD Snooping Overview

Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a protocol that is used by IPv6 multicast routers to

discover the presence of multicast listeners (nodes that want to receive IPv6 multicast

packets) on its directly attached links and to discover which multicast packets are of interest

to neighboring nodes. MLD is derived from IGMP; MLD version 1 (MLDv1) is equivalent to

IGMPv2, and MLD version 2 (MLDv2) is equivalent to IGMPv3.

MLD is a subprotocol of Internet Control Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6), and MLD

messages are a subset of ICMPv6 messages, identified in IPv6 packets by a preceding Next

Header value of 58.

The switch can snoop on both MLDv1 and MLDv2 protocol packets and bridge IPv6 multicast

data based on destination IPv6 multicast MAC addresses. You can configure the switch to

perform MLD snooping and IGMP snooping simultaneously.

In IPv4, Layer 2 switches can use IGMP snooping to limit the flooding of multicast traffic by

dynamically configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that multicast traffic is forwarded to only those

interfaces associated with IP multicast address. In IPv6, MLD snooping performs a similar

function. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is selectively forwarded to a list of ports

that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all ports in a VLAN. The switch

constructs this list by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual144

The switch uses MLD snooping to build a forwarding list for multicast traffic.

Configure the Global MLD Snooping Settings

You can enable MLD snooping globally.

To enable MLD snooping globally:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Configuration.

The MLD Snooping Configuration page displays. The page also displays the VLAN IDs

Enabled for MLD Snooping section.

6. Select the MLD Snooping Admin Mode Enable radio button.

By default, the Disable radio button is selected.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The VLAN IDs Enabled For MLD Snooping section displays the VLAN IDs, if any, for

which MLD snooping is enabled.

Configure MLD Snooping for a VLAN

When you enable MLD snooping globally (see Configure the Global MLD Snooping

Settings on page 144), you can enable MLD snooping on a per-VLAN basis.

To configure MLD snooping for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual145

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration.

The MLD VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

7. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable.

8. From the Fast Leave Admin Mode menu, select to enable or disable the MLD snooping

Fast Leave mode.

Enabling Fast Leave mode lets the switch immediately remove the Layer 2 LAN

interfaces from its forwarding table entry upon receiving an MLD Done message for that

multicast group without first sending MAC-based general queries to the interface.

We recommend that you enable Fast Leave admin mode only on VLANs for which only

one host is connected to a Layer 2 LAN port. This mode prevents the inadvertent

dropping of the other hosts that are connected to the same Layer 2 LAN port but are

configured to receive multicast traffic. Also, fast leave processing is supported only with

MLD version 1 hosts.

9. In the Group Membership Interval field, set the value for the group membership interval of

MLD snooping.

The valid range is 4 to 3620 seconds. The default value is 260 seconds.

10. In the Maximum Response Time field, set the value for the maximum response time of

MLD snooping.

The valid range is 1 to 20 seconds. The default value is 20 seconds. This value must be

shorter than the group membership interval value.

11. Click the Add button.

MLD snooping is enabled on the specified VLAN.

The Multicast Router Expiry Time field is a calculated field, displaying the value for the

multicast router expiration time of MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID. This value is

calculated as the value in the Group Membership Interval field minus the value in the

Maximum Response Time field.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual146

Configure a Multicast Router Interface on a VLAN

When you connect an external multicast router to a switch interface that is a member of a

VLAN and you configure that switch interface as a multicast router interface, the external

multicast router is automatically added to the list of learned multicast routers.

This dynamic learning mode is applicable only to multicast router information (that is, to

queries from an attached true querier). In such a situation, you do not need to enable a

snooping dynamic learning mode (that is, the snooping interface mode or the snooping VLAN

mode) for the multicast router interface.

To configure a multicast router interface on a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN Configuration.

The Multicast Router VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the multicast router interface.

This is the interface to which an external multicast router is connected.

7. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID of which the interface must be a member.

8. From the Multicast Router menu, select Enable to enable the multicast router mode for the

VLAN (and therefore, for the multicast router interface).

By default, Disable is selected.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual147

Configure MLD Snooping Querier

You can configure the settings for an MLD snooping querier.

To configure an MLD snooping querier:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier Configuration.

The MLD Snooping Querier Configuration page displays. The page also shows the VLAN

IDs Enabled for MLD Snooping Querier section.

6. Configure the following settings:

• Querier Admin Mode. Enable or disable MLD snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.

• Snooping Querier Address. Enter an IPv6 address that is used as the source

address in periodic MLD queries. This address is used when no address is configured

on the VLAN on which a query is sent. The supported IPv6 address formats are

x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x and x::x.

• MLD Version. This is a field with the fixed value 1, which indicates that MLDv1 is the

version that is used in periodic MLD queries.

• Query Interval (secs). Specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries

sent by the snooping querier. The query interval must be a value in the range of 30 to

1800. The default value is 125.

• Querier Expiry Interval (secs). This is a field with a calculated value that shows the

interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed. The interval is

calculated as 2 * Query Interval + 5. The default value is 255.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The VLAN IDs Enabled for MLD Snooping Querier section displays the IDs of the VLANs

for which MLD snooping querier is enabled (see Configure MLD Snooping Querier

VLAN Settings on page 148).

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual148

Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings

To configure MLD snooping querier VLAN settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration.

The MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID on which the MLD snooping querier is

administratively enabled.

7. From the Querier Election Participate Mode menu, select to enable or disable the querier

participation election mode for MLD snooping.

When this mode is disabled, on detecting another querier of same version in the VLAN,

the snooping querier moves to a non-querier state. When this mode is enabled, the

snooping querier participates in querier election where the lowest IP address wins the

querier election and operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

8. In the Querier VLAN Address field, specify the snooping querier address to be used as the

source address in periodic MLD queries sent on the specified VLAN.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual149

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 41. MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration information

Field Description

Operational State The operational state of the MLD snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of the

following states:

• Enabled. Snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch sends

out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query

interval. If the snooping switch detects a better (numerically lower) querier in the

VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.

• Disabled. Snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The snooping querier

moves to disabled mode when MLD snooping is not operational on the VLAN or

when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is

also not configured.

Operational Version The operational MLD protocol version of the querier.

Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.

Last Querier Version The MLD protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the

VLAN.

Operational Max

Response Time

The maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the snooping

querier.

Configure a Multicast Group

You can configure up to 512 static multicast groups. You create a multicast group by adding a

multicast MAC address to a VLAN. The multicast MAC address becomes the group identifier.

To configure a multicast group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > Static Multicast Address > Multicast Group

Configuration.

The Multicast Group Configuration page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual150

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

7. In the Multicast Address field, enter the multicast MAC address that must become the

group identifier.

8. Click the Add button.

The multicast group is added.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Remove a Multicast Group

You can remove a multicast group that you no longer need. Because the multicast MAC

address is the multicast group identifier. You remove a multicast group by removing the static

multicast address from the VLAN to which it is assigned.

To remove one or more multicast groups:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > Static Multicast Address > Multicast Group

Configuration.

The Multicast Group Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check boxes for the statically added multicast addresses that you want to remove.

Table 42. Multicast Group Configuration information

Field Definition

VLAN Name The VLAN name, if any, that is associated with the VLAN ID.

Type The type of multicast group, which is determined by the way in which

members are added to the group:

• Dynamic. Members are added dynamically to the multicast group. By

default, all groups are dynamic groups.

• Static. If you add static members to the multicast group (see Configure

Multicast Group Membership on page 151), the group becomes a

static group.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual151

You cannot select a check box for a dynamically added multicast address.

7. Click the Delete button.

The multicast groups are removed.

Configure Multicast Group Membership

By default, an interface is excluded from multicast groups but could be dynamically added to

any multicast group. You can manually add interfaces to a group (which changes the type of

the group from dynamic to static) and you can lock interfaces so that they cannot be added

dynamically to a group.

To configure multicast group membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > Static Multicast Address > Multicast Group

Membership.

The Multicast Group Membership page displays. The page also displays the Multicast

Group section.

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID for the VLAN in which the multicast group is

located.

The Multicast Address of the VLAN is displayed and If a name is associated with the

VLAN, the name displays in the VLAN Name field.

7. From the Multicast Address menu, select the MAC address that identifies the multicast

group.

8. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

9. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual152

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

10. From the Interface Status menu, select one of the following options:

• Static. The interface becomes a static member of the multicast group on the selected

VLAN.

• Forbidden. The interface is forbidden from joining the multicast group on the selected

VLAN.

• Excluded. The interface is not a static member of the multicast group but could

become a dynamic member of a multicast group on the selected VLAN. This is the

default state.

Note: If an interface was added dynamically to the multicast group as a result

of IGMP or MLD snooping, the status of the interface is Dynamic. You

cannot select this status manually.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the Multicast Forward All Option

After IGMP snooping is enabled, multicast packets are forwarded only to the members of

multicast groups. However, you can enable the Multicast Forward All option for an interface

so that the interface receives and forwards all multicast traffic on the VLAN.

To enable the Multicast Forward All option for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > Static Multicast Address > Multicast Forward All.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual153

The Multicast Forward All page displays.

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID for the VLAN in which the multicast group is

located.

If a name is associated with the VLAN, the name displays in the VLAN Name field.

7. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Interface Status menu, select one of the following options:

• Static. The interface receives all multicast traffic on the VLAN and forwards the traffic.

• Forbidden. The interface cannot receive any multicast traffic on the VLAN, even if

the IGMP or MLD snooping process designated the interface as a member of a

multicast group.

• Excluded. The Multicast Forward All option is not enabled on the interface, that is,

the interface does not forward all multicast traffic on the VLAN. This is the default

state.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View, Search, and Manage the MAC

Address Table

The Address Table (or MAC Address Table) contains information about unicast MAC address

entries for which the switch saved forwarding or filtering information. The transparent bridging

function uses this information in determining how to propagate a received frame. Use the

search function of the Address Table page to display information about the entries in the

table.

You can also add static entries to the Address Table and specify the period after which

dynamic MAC address entries that are not updated are automatically removed from the

Address Table.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual154

From the Switching > Address Table > Advanced menu, you can access pages that are

described in the following sections:

•View and Search the MAC Address Table on page 154

•Change the Aging-Out Period of Dynamic MAC Addresses on page 155

•Add a Static MAC Address on page 156

•Remove a Static MAC Address on page 156

View and Search the MAC Address Table

To view and search the MAC Address Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Address Table.

The Address Table page displays. The page also displays the MAC Address Table

section.

6. From the Search By menu, select one of the following options:

• VLAN ID. In the Search By field, enter a VLAN ID.

• Mac Address. In the Search By field, enter a MAC address as six 2-digit

hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example, 00:01:23:43:45:67.

• Interface. In the Search By field, enter an interface number.

7. Click the Go button.

If the searched value exists, the entry is displayed.

Total MAC Addresses field shows the total number of MAC addresses in the MAC

Address Table.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual155

The following table describes the information in the MAC Address Table.

Table 43. MAC Address Table information

Field Description

VLAN ID The VLAN that is associated with the MAC address.

MAC Address The MAC address. The format is six 2-digit hexadecimal numbers that are

separated by colons, for example, 01:00:5e:45:67:89.

Interface The interface that is associated with the MAC address.

Status The type of the entry. Static entries were manually configured (see Add a Static

MAC Address on page 156). Dynamic entries were added to the table as a

result of a learning process or protocol.

Change the Aging-Out Period of Dynamic MAC

Addresses

You can change the aging-out period after which a learned MAC address entry that is not

updated is automatically removed from the forwarding database. By default, this period is

300 seconds. The forwarding database contains static entries, which never age out, and

dynamically learned entries, which are removed if they are not updated before the aging-out

period expires.

To change the aging-out period of dynamic MAC addresses.

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Address Table > Advanced > Dynamic Address.

The Dynamic Address page displays.

6. In the Address Aging Timeout (seconds) field, enter the aging-out period in seconds.

The range is 10 to 500 seconds. The default is 300 seconds.

7. Click the Apply button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual156

Your settings are saved.

Add a Static MAC Address

To add a static MAC address:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Address Table > Advanced > Static MAC Address.

The Static MAC Address page displays.

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select a VLAN ID.

7. In the MAC Address field, enter the MAC address as six 2-digit hexadecimal numbers

separated by colons, for example, 00:01:23:43:45:67.

8. From the Interface menu, select the interface to which the MAC address must be applied.

9. Click the Add button.

The MAC Address is added to the Static MAC Address table and to the MAC Address

Table.

Remove a Static MAC Address

To remove a static MAC address:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Switching User Manual157

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Address Table > Advanced > Static MAC Address.

The Static MAC Address page displays.

6. In the Static MAC Address table, select the check box for the MAC address.

In the previous figure, none is shown.

7. Click the Delete button.

The MAC address is removed from the Static MAC Address table and from the MAC

Address Table.

158

4Configure Routing

This chapter contains the following sections.

•IP Routing Overview

•Configure IP Settings

•Configure VLAN Routing

•Manage IPv4 Routes

•Configure Address Resolution Protocol

•Configure IPv6

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual159

IP Routing Overview

The switch supports IP routing. When a packet enters the switch, the destination MAC

address is checked to see if it matches any of the configured routing interfaces. If it does, the

switch searches the host table for a matching destination IP address. If an entry is found, the

packet is routed to the host. If no matching entry is found, the switch performs a longest

prefix match on the destination IP address. If an entry is found, the packet is routed to the

next hop. If no match is found, the packet is routed to the next hop specified in the default

route. If no default route exists, the packet is handled appropriately by the switch.

The routing table can include static entries that were manually added. The host table can

include static entries that were manually added and entries that were dynamically added

through ARP.

Configure IP Settings

From the Routing > IP menu, you can access pages that are described in the following

sections:

•Configure the Routing Settings on page 159

•View the IP Statistics on page 160

Configure the Routing Settings

Use the IP Configuration page to configure routing settings for the switch.

To enable routing on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing > IP > IP Configuration.

The IP Configuration page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual160

6. Select the Routing Mode Enable radio button.

You must enable the routing mode before the switch can route through any of its

interfaces. If you enable the routing mode, routing becomes also possible for VLAN

interfaces. The default value is Enable.

7. In the IPv4 MTU field, enter the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for IPv4 packets.

The MTU for IPv4 packets can range from 576 to 9000. The default is 1500.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the IP configuration information displayed on the page.

Table 44. Global IP status information

Field Description

Default Time to Live The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of

datagrams originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by the

transport layer protocol. The default value is 64.

Maximum Next Hops The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. This is a compile-time

constant. The default value is 1.

View the IP Statistics

The statistics reported on this page are as specified in RFC 1213.

To view statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IP > Statistics.

The IP Statistics page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual161

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 45. IP Statistics information

Field Description

IpInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including

those received in error.

IpInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers,

including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors,

time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and

so on.

IpInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their

IP header’s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this

entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and

addresses of unsupported classes (Class E). For entities that are not IP

gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes

datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local

address.

IpForwDatagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP

destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to

forward them to that final destination. In entities that do not act as IP

gateways, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed

through this entity, and the source-route option processing was successful.

IpInUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but

discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

IpInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered

to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded (for lack of

buffer space). This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while

awaiting re-assembly.

IpInDelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user

protocols (including ICMP).

IpOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user protocols (including

ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not

include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.

IpOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered

to prevent their transmission to their destination, but that were discarded for

reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter would include

datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this

(discretionary) discard criterion.

IpOutNoRoutes The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to

transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any packets

counted in ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion. This includes

any datagrams that a host cannot route because all of its default gateways

are down.

IpReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds for which received fragments are held

while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.

IpReasmReqds The number of IP fragments received that were reassembled at this entity.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual162

IpReasmOKs The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.

IpReasmFails The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for

whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a

count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the

number of fragments by combining them as they are received.

IpFragOKs The number of IP datagrams that were fragmented at this entity.

IpFragFails The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed to

be fragmented at this entity but could not be, for reasons such as their Don't

Fragment flag was set.

IpFragCreates The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of

fragmentation at this entity.

IpRoutingDiscards The number of routing entries that were discarded even though they were

valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up

buffer space for other routing entries.

IcmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received. This counter

includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.

IcmpInErrors The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but determined as

having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).

IcmpInDestUnreachs The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages received.

IcmpInTimeExcds The number of ICMP time exceeded messages received.

IcmpInParmProbs The number of ICMP parameter problem messages received.

IcmpInSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP source quench messages received.

IcmpInRedirects The number of ICMP redirect messages received.

IcmpInEchos The number of ICMP echo (request) messages received.

IcmpInEchoReps The number of ICMP echo reply messages received.

IcmpInTimestamps The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages received.

IcmpInTimestampReps The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages received.

IcmpInAddrMasks The number of ICMP address mask request messages received.

IcmpInAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP address mask reply messages received.

IcmpOutMsgs The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send. This

counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.

IcmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send due to

problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value does

not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of

IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there might be

no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.

Table 45. IP Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual163

Configure VLAN Routing

You can configure the switch with some ports supporting VLANs and some supporting

routing. You can also configure the switch to allow traffic on a VLAN to be treated as if the

VLAN were a router port.

When a port is enabled for bridging (the default) rather than routing, all normal bridge

processing is performed for an inbound packet, which is then associated with a VLAN. Its

MAC destination address (MAC DA) and VLAN ID are used to search the MAC address

table. If routing is enabled for the VLAN, and the MAC DA of an inbound unicast packet is

that of the internal bridge-router interface, the packet is routed. An inbound multicast packet

is forwarded to all ports in the VLAN, plus the internal bridge-router interface, if it was

received on a routed VLAN.

Because a port can be configured to belong to more than one VLAN, VLAN routing might be

enabled for all of the VLANs on the port, or for a subset. VLAN routing can be used to allow

more than one physical port to reside on the same subnet. It could also be used when a

VLAN spans multiple physical networks, or when additional segmentation or security is

required. This section shows how to configure the switch to support VLAN routing.

From the Routing > VLAN menu, you can access pages that are described in the following

sections:

•Use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard on page 164

•VLAN Routing Configuration on page 165

IcmpOutDestUnreachs The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages sent.

IcmpOutTimeExcds The number of ICMP time exceeded messages sent.

IcmpOutParmProbs The number of ICMP parameter problem messages sent.

IcmpOutSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP source quench messages sent.

IcmpOutRedirects The number of ICMP redirect messages sent. For a host, this is always

zero, since hosts do not send redirects.

IcmpOutEchos The number of ICMP echo (request) messages sent.

IcmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP echo reply messages sent.

IcmpOutTimestamps The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages.

IcmpOutTimestampReps The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages sent.

IcmpOutAddrMasks The number of ICMP address mask request messages sent.

Table 45. IP Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual164

Use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard

The VLAN Routing Wizard lets you create a VLAN routing interface, configure the IP address

and subnet mask for the interface, and add ports or LAGs to the VLAN. With this wizard, you

can do the following:

•Create a VLAN.

•Add ports to a newly created VLAN.

•Remove selected ports from the default VLAN.

•Enable tagging on a selected port if the port is in another VLAN. Disable tagging if the

selected port does not exist in another VLAN.

•Add LAGs to a newly created VLAN.

•Remove selected LAGs from the default VLAN.

•Enable tagging on a selected LAG if the LAG is in another VLAN. Disable tagging if the

selected LAG does not exist in another VLAN.

•Enable routing on the VLAN using the IP address and subnet mask entered.

To use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> VLAN > VLAN Routing Wizard.

The VLAN Routing Wizard page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID that is associated with the VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.

7. In the IP Address field, define the IP address of the VLAN interface.

8. In the Network Mask field, define the subnet mask of the VLAN interface.

9. In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the port to the default settings:

• T (Tagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.

The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual165

• U (Untagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is excluded from the VLAN

but can be dynamically registered (autodetected) in the VLAN through GVRP.

10. In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the LAG to the default settings:

• T (Tagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

tagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• U (Untagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is excluded from the VLAN

but can be dynamically registered (autodetected) in the VLAN through GVRP.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

VLAN Routing Configuration

To configure VLAN routing:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration.

The VLAN Routing Configuration page displays.

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN.

This menu displays the IDs of all VLANs that are configured on the switch.

7. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address to be configured for the VLAN routing interface.

8. In the Subnet Mask field, enter the subnet mask to be configured for the VLAN routing

interface.

9. Click the Add button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual166

The VLAN routing interface is added for the selected VLAN.

The MAC Address field displays the MAC address that is associated with the VLAN

routing interface.

Manage IPv4 Routes

The routing table collects routes from multiple sources: static routes and local routes. The

routing table can learn multiple routes to the same destination from multiple sources. The

routing table lists all routes.

To configure a basic route and view the table with learned routers:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> Routing Table > Route Configuration.

6. From the Route Type menu, select one of the following route types:

• Default. Creates a default route. You must specify the next hop address and

preference.

• Static. Creates a static route. You must specify the network address, subnet mask,

next hop address, and preference.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual167

7. Depending on the type of route that you are creating, specify the following information:

a. In the Network Address field, specify the IP address for the destination.

b. In the Subnet Mask field, specify the subnet mask for the attached network.

c. In the Next Hop IP Address field, specify the outgoing router IP address to use

when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.

The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local

interface for a directly attached network.

d. In the Preference field, specify the preference (sometimes called administrative

distance), which is an integer value from 1 to 255.

You can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance) of

an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the

lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By

specifying the preference of a static route, you control whether a static route is more

or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also

controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the

same destination.

8. Click the Add button.

The static route is added to the switch.

9. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.

Table 46. Learned Routes information

Field Description

Route Type The type of route: Static or Dynamic, depending on how the route was added.

Network Address The IP address for the destination.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the destination.

Protocol This field states which protocol created the specified route. The possibilities are one of the

following:

• Local

• Static

Next Hop Interface The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the destination.

Next Hop Address The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in

the path toward the destination. The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors

or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.

Preference The preference value for the configured next hop.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual168

Configure Address Resolution Protocol

The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) associates a Layer 2 MAC address with a Layer 3

IPv4 address. The switch supports both dynamic and manual ARP configurations. With

manual ARP configuration, you can statically add entries into the ARP table.

ARP is a necessary part of the Internet Protocol (IP) and is used to translate an IP address to

a media (MAC) address, defined by a local area network (LAN) such as Ethernet. A station

that must send an IP packet must learn the MAC address of the IP destination, or of the next

hop router if the destination is not on the same subnet. This is achieved by broadcasting an

ARP request packet, to which the intended recipient responds by unicasting an ARP reply

containing its MAC address. Once learned, the MAC address is used in the destination

address field of the Layer 2 header prepended to the IP packet.

The ARP cache is a table maintained locally in each station on a network. The switch learns

ARP cache entries by examining the source information in the ARP packet payload fields,

regardless of whether it is an ARP request or response. Thus, when an ARP request is

broadcast to all stations on a LAN segment or virtual LAN (VLAN), each recipient can store

the sender’s IP and MAC address in its respective ARP cache. The ARP response, being

unicast, is normally seen only by the requestor, who stores the sender information in its ARP

cache. Newer information always replaces existing content in the ARP cache.

Devices can be moved in a network, which means that the IP address that was at one time

associated with a certain MAC address is now found using a different MAC, or it disappeared

from the network altogether (for example, it was reconfigured, disconnected, or powered off).

This leads to stale information in the ARP cache unless entries are updated in reaction to

new information seen on the network, periodically refreshed to determine if an address still

exists, or removed from the cache if the entry was identified as a sender of an ARP packet

during the course of an ageout interval, usually specified through configuration.

The switch supports 512 ARP entries. These entries include dynamic and static ARP entries.

From the Routing > ARP > Advanced menu, you can access pages that are described in

the following sections:

•Display the ARP Cache on page 168

•Add an Entry to the ARP Table on page 169

•Configure the Global Aging-Out Time for ARP on page 170

•Remove an ARP Entry From the ARP Cache on page 171

Display the ARP Cache

You can display ARP entries in the ARP cache based on the remote connections most

recently detected switch.

To display ARP entries in the ARP cache:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual169

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> ARP > Basic > ARP Cache.

The ARP Cache page displays.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 47. ARP cache information

Field Description

Interface The routing interface associated with the ARP entry.

IP Address The IP address of the device (on a subnet) that is attached an existing routing

interface of the switch.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address of the attached device. The address is six two-digit

hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example, 00:06:29:32:81:40.

Type The type of ARP entry. Possible values are as follows:

• Static. An ARP entry that was manually configured.

• Dynamic. An ARP entry that was learned by the router.

Add an Entry to the ARP Table

You can add an entry to the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table.

To add an entry to the ARP table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual170

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> ARP > Advanced > ARP Create.

The Static ARP Configuration page displays. The page also shows the Routing VLAN

ARP Cache section.

6. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address.

This must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch’s

existing routing interfaces.

7. In the MAC Address field, specify the unicast MAC address of the device.

Enter the address as six 2-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example,

00:06:29:32:81:40.

8. Click the Add button.

The static ARP entry is added to the switch.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 48. Routing VLANs ARP Cache information

Field Description

Interface The routing interface associated with the ARP entry.

IP Address The IP address of the device (on a subnet) that is attached an existing routing interface

of the switch.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address of the attached device. The address is six two-digit

hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example, 00:06:29:32:81:40.

Type The type of ARP entry. Possible values are as follows:

• Static. An ARP entry that was manually configured.

• Dynamic. An ARP entry that was learned by the router.

Configure the Global Aging-Out Time for ARP

You can change the global aging-out time for the ARP table. The aging-out time is the period

after which an entry in the ARP is automatically deleted.

To configure the global aging-out time for the ARP table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual171

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> ARP > Advanced > Global ARP Configuration.

The Global ARP Configuration page displays.

6. In the Age Time (secs) field, enter the time, in seconds, that a dynamic ARP entry remains

in the ARP table before aging out.

The range is 15 to 21600 seconds. The default value is 1200 seconds.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove an ARP Entry From the ARP Cache

You can remove all or specific entries from the ARP table.

To remove entries from the ARP table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> ARP > Advanced > ARP Entry Management.

The ARP Entry Management page displays.

6. From the Remove From Table menu, select the type of ARP entry to be deleted:

• All Dynamic Entries

• All Static Entries

• All Entries

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual172

• Specific Entry. Lets you specify the IP address to be removed.

7. If you select Specific Entry, in the Remove IP Address field, enter the IP address to be

removed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual173

Configure IPv6

IPv6 is supported only on VLAN interfaces, not on physical ports.

From the Routing > IPv6 > Advanced menu, you can access pages that are described in

the following sections:

•Configure IPv6 Global Settings on page 173

•Add a Static IPv6 Route on page 174

•View the IPv6 Route Table on page 177

•Configure IPv6 VLAN Interface Settings on page 178

•Add an IPv6 Global Address to an IPv6 VLAN on page 180

•Add an IPv6 Prefix for Advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN on page 183

•View IPv6 Statistics for an Interface on page 186

•View or Clear the IPv6 Neighbor Table on page 188

Configure IPv6 Global Settings

You can configure IPv6 routing parameters for the switch, as opposed to for an interface.

To configure IPv6 global settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Global Configuration.

The IPv6 Global Configuration page displays.

6. Next to IPv6 Unicast Routing, select the Enable radio button to globally enable IPv6 unicast

routing.

By default, the Disable radio button is selected.

7. In the IPv6 Hop Limit field, enter a value for the unicast hop count used in IPv6 packets

originated by the node.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual174

The value is also included in router advertisements. The valid values for hops are 1 to

255, inclusive. The default is 64.

8. In the ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error Interval field, specify the number of ICMP error packets

allowed per burst interval.

This value controls the ICMPv6 error packets. The default rate limit is 100 packets per

second, meaning that the burst interval is 1000 mseconds. To disable ICMP rate limiting,

set this field to 0. The valid rate interval must be in the range 0 to 2147483647 mseconds.

9. In the ICMPv6 Rate Limit Burst Size field, specify the number of ICMP error packets

allowed per burst interval.

This value controls the ICMP error packets. The default burst size is 100 packets. When

the burst interval is 0, then configuring this field is not a valid operation. The valid burst

size is 1 to 200.

10. In the IPv6 MTU field, enter the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for IPv6 packets.

The MTU for IPv6 packets can range from 1280 to 9000. The default is 1500.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Add a Static IPv6 Route

To add a static IPv6 route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Route Table.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual175

6. In the IPv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 network prefix for the destination.

7. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for the destination.

8. In the Next Hop IPv6 Address Type menu, select one of the following types of IPv6

address for the next hop router:

• Link Local. A link-local IPv6 address over a specified interface. With this selection,

you must select an interface from the Interface menu.

• Global. A global IPv6 address. With this selection, the Interface menu becomes

unavailable.

9. In the Next Hop IPv6 Address field, specify the outgoing router IPv6 address to use when

forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.

The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IPv6 address of the local

interface for a directly attached network.

10. In the Interface menu, select the outgoing IPv6 routing VLAN interface that must be used to

forward traffic to the destination.

Selecting an interface applies only when the selection in the Next Hop IPv6 Address

Type menu is Link Local.

11. In the Preference field, specify the router preference.

12. Click the Add button.

The route is added to the switch.

Change the Preference for a Static IPv6 Route

To change the preference for a static IPv6 route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual176

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Route Table.

The Configure Routes page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Route Table.

6. In the table in the Configure Routes section, select the check box for the static IPv6 route.

7. In the Preference field, specify another router preference.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a Static IPv6 Route

To remove one or more static IPv6 routes:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Route Table.

The Configure Routes page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Route Table.

6. In the table in the Configure Routes section, select the check boxes for the static IPv6

routes.

7. Click the Delete button.

The routes are removed from the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual177

View the IPv6 Route Table

The IPv6 Route Table contains IPv6 routes that were statically added, IPv6 routes that were

discovered through the Neighbor Discovery (ND) protocol, and IPv6 routes that were derived

from manually added IPV6 addresses.

To view the IPv6 Route Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Route Table.

6. To specify which type of routes to display in the IPv6 Route Table, from the Routes

Displayed menu, select one of the following options:

• All Routes. Show all active IPv6 routes.

• All Static Routes. Show only the manually configured routes.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual178

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Configure IPv6 VLAN Interface Settings

Configure IPv6 VLAN interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > VLAN Configuration.

Table 49. IPv6 Route Table information

Field Description

Number of Routes The total number of active routes in the route table.

IPv6 Prefix The network prefix for the active route.

Prefix Length The prefix length for the active route.

Protocol The type of protocol for the active route:

• Static. The route was manually defined.

• ND (Neighbor Discovery). The route was discovered through the ND

protocol.

• Connected. The route was derived from a manually configured IPv6

address.

Next Hop Interface The interface over which the route is active. For a rejected route, the next

hop would be a Null0 interface.

Next Hop IP Address The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.

Preference The route preference of the configured route.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual179

The page is very wide and is therefore shown in the following two figures.

6. To view more columns, move the gray bar below the table to the right.

7. Select one or more VLANs by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single VLAN, select the check box associated with the VLAN, or, in the

Go To VLAN field, type the VLAN in the format VLANxx in which xx is the VLAN ID,

and click the Go button. (VLANxxx in which xxx is the VLAND ID and VLANxxxx in

which xxxx is the VLAN ID are also valid search entries.)

•To configure multiple VLANs with the same settings, select the check box associated

with each VLAN.

•To configure all VLANs with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the IPv6 Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

When IPv6 mode is enabled, the VLAN is capable of IPv6 operation. The default value is

Disable.

9. From the Stateless Address AutoConfig Mode menu, select to enable or disable the

stateless address autoconfiguration mode.

The default value is Disable.

10. In the Duplicate Address Detection Transmits field, specify the number of duplicate

address detection (DAD) transmits.

The DAD transmits value must be in the range 0 to 600. The default is 1.

11. In the Life Time Interval field, specify the router advertisement life time interval that is sent

from the VLAN.

This value must be greater than or equal to the maximum advertisement interval.

0 means do not use the router as the default router. The range of router life time is 0 to

9000. The default is 1800.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual180

12. In the Adv NS Interval field, specify the retransmission time of router advertisements that

are sent from the VLAN.

A value of 0 means the interval is not specified for the router. The range of the neighbor

solicit interval is 1000 to 4294967295. The default is 0.

13. In the Adv Reachable Interval field, specify the router advertisement time.

This is the time allocated to consider the neighbors reachable after ND confirmation. The

range of reachable time is 0 to 3600000. The default is 0.

14. In the Adv Interval field, specify the maximum time that is allowed between outgoing router

advertisements from the VLAN.

The range of the maximum advertisement interval is 4 to 1800. The default value is 600.

15. From the Adv Managed Config Flag menu, specify the setting for the router advertisement

managed address configuration flag.

When you select Enable, end nodes use DHCPv6. When you select Disable, end nodes

autoconfigure addresses. The default value is Disable.

16. From the Adv Other Config Flag menu, select to enable or disable the router

advertisement other stateful configuration flag.

The default value is Disable.

17. From the Adv Suppress Flag menu, select to enable or disable the router advertisement

suppression on the VLAN.

The default value is Disable.

18. From the Destination Unreachables menu, select to enable or disable the mode for

sending ICMPv6 destination unreachable messages from the VLAN.

If this mode is disabled, the VLAN does not send ICMPv6 destination unreachable

messages. By default, the IPv6 destination unreachables mode is enabled.

19. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 50. IPv6 VLAN Configuration information

Field Description

Operational Mode The operational mode of the VLAN (Enable or Disable).

Link State The state of the link (Link Up or LInk Down).

Add an IPv6 Global Address to an IPv6 VLAN

IPv6 link-local addresses are created automatically when you enable the IPv6 admin mode

on an VLAN interface, and they cannot be removed or edited. However, you can manually

configure IPv6 global addresses on a VLAN.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual181

To add an IPv6 global address to an IPv6 VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > IPv6 Addresses.

The table contains both IPv6 link-local addresses and IPv6 global addresses that were

manually added to the IPv6 VLAN.

6. From the Interface menu, select the VLAN.

7. For the IPv6 Prefix field and the Prefix Length field, either select the check box for a

preconfigured IPv6 address, or specify a new IPv6 address by entering an IPv6 prefix and

prefix length in the global address format.

8. From the EUI64 menu, select Enable or Disable to indicate whether the specified 64-bit

unicast prefix is enabled.

The default value is Disable.

9. Click the Add button.

The IPv6 address is added to the VLAN.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual182

The Current State field is a nonconfigurable field that shows the state of the IPv6 address.

The state can be one of the following:

• Tent. Routing is disabled or the address does not work because of a duplicate

address detection (DAD) condition.

• Active. The IPv6 address is valid and active.

• Preferred. The IPv6 address was verified to be unique, valid, and active.

Change the Settings for an IPv6 Global Address on an IPv6

VLAN

IPv6 link-local addresses are created automatically when you enable the IPv6 admin mode

on an VLAN interface, and they cannot be changed. However, you can change the settings

for an IPv6 global address that you added on a VLAN.

To change the settings for an IPv6 global address on an IPv6 VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > IPv6 Addresses.

The IPv6 Interface Selection page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Interface

Configuration table.

6. From the Interface menu, select the VLAN.

7. Select the check box for the IPv6 global address.

You cannot select a check box for an IPv6 link-local address.

The settings display in the fields in the table heading.

8. Change the settings as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual183

Remove an IPv6 Global Address From an IPv6 VLAN

IPv6 link-local addresses are created automatically when you enable the IPv6 admin mode

on an VLAN interface, and they cannot be removed or edited. However, you can manually

remove one or more IPv6 global addresses from a VLAN.

To remove one or more IPv6 global addresses from an IPv6 VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > IPv6 Addresses.

The IPv6 Interface Selection page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Interface

Configuration table.

6. From the Interface menu, select the VLAN.

7. Select the check boxes for the IPv6 global addresses.

You cannot select any check boxes for IPv6 link-local addresses.

8. Click the Delete button.

The IPv6 global addresses are removed from the IPv6 VLAN.

Add an IPv6 Prefix for Advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN

When you add an IPv6 prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN, the prefix is advertised on

all interfaces that are members of the VLAN.

To add an IPv6 prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual184

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration.

6. From the Interface menu, select the VLAN.

7. In the Ipv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 prefix.

8. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length.

9. In the Valid Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.

This is the time during which the switch considers the prefix valid for on-link

determination. The valid life time must be in the range 0 to 4294967295. The default

value is 2592000.

10. In the Preferred Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.

An autoconfigured address generated from this prefix is preferred. The preferred life time

must be in the range 0 to 4294967295. The default value is 604800.

11. From the Onlink Flag menu, select one of the following options:

• Onlink. The prefix can be used for on-link determination. The default is Onlink.

• No-Onlink. The prefix cannot be used for on-link determination.

• Off-Link. The prefix can be inserted in the routing table.

12. From the Autonomous Flag menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether the

selected prefix can be used for autonomous address configuration.

The default value is Enable.

13. Click the Add button.

The IPv6 address prefix is added to the VLAN.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual185

Change the Settings for an IPv6 Prefix for Advertisement

an IPv6 VLAN

You can change the settings for a prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN.

To change the settings for an IPv6 prefix for advertisement on an IPv6 VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration.

The IPv6 Interface Selection page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Interface

Configuration table.

6. From the Interface menu, select the VLAN.

7. Select the check box for the IPv6 prefix.

The settings display in the fields in the table heading.

8. Change the settings as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove an IPv6 Prefix From an IPv6 VLAN

You can remove one or more IPv6 prefixes from an IPv6 VLAN. You cannot remove the

default IPv6 prefix.

To remove one or more IPv6 prefixes from an IPv6 VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual186

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration.

The IPv6 Interface Selection page displays. The page also shows the IPv6 Interface

Configuration table.

6. From the Interface menu, select the VLAN.

7. Select the check boxes for the IPv6 prefixes.

8. Click the Delete button.

The IPv6 prefixes are removed from the IPv6 VLAN.

View IPv6 Statistics for an Interface

To view IPv6 statistics for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Statistics.

The IPv6 Interface Statistics page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

When you select an interface, the page refreshes and all fields are updated.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual187

The following table describes the nonconfigurable IPv6 statistics that are displayed.

Table 51. IPv6 Statistics information

Field Description

Total Datagrams Received The total number of input datagrams received by the interface, including

those received in error.

Received Datagrams Locally

Delivered

The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6

user-protocols (including ICMP). This counter is incremented at the

interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be

the input interface for some of the datagrams.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To Header Errors

The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IPv6

headers, including version number mismatch, other format errors, hop

count exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IPv6 options, and

so on.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To MTU

The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because their

size exceeded the link MTU of outgoing interface.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To No Route

The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be

found to transmit them to their destination.

Received Datagrams With Unknown

Protocol

The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but

discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This counter

is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed,

which might not be the input interface for some of the datagrams.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To Invalid Address

The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in

their IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be received

at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, ::0) and

unsupported addresses (such as addresses with unallocated prefixes).

For entities that are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward

datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the

destination address was not a local address.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Due To Truncated Data

The number of input datagrams discarded because datagram frame didn't

carry enough data.

Received Datagrams Discarded

Other

The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were

encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were

discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter does not

include any datagrams discarded while awaiting reassembly.

Received Datagrams Reassembly

Required

The number of IPv6 fragments received that needed to be reassembled at

this interface. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these

fragments were addressed, which might not be the input interface for

some of the fragments.

Datagrams Successfully

Reassembled

The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. This counter is

incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed,

which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the

fragments.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual188

View or Clear the IPv6 Neighbor Table

To view or clear the IPv6 Neighbor Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Neighbor Table.

The IPv6 Neighbor Table displays.

6. Use the Search menu and field to search for IPv6 routes by IPv6 address or interface

number:

• Search by IPv6 address. Select IPv6 Address from the Search menu. Enter the

128-byte hexadecimal IPv6 address in four-digit groups separated by colons, for

example, 2001:231F:::1. Then click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

• Search by Interface. Select Interface from the Search menu. Enter the interface

using the respective naming convention (for example, xg1 or l1). Then click the Go

button.

Datagrams Failed To Reassemble The number of failures detected by the IPv6 reassembly algorithm (for

whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a

count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms (notably the

algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by

combining them as they are received. This counter is incremented at the

interface to which these fragments were addressed, which might not be

the input interface for some of the fragments.

Datagrams Forwarded The number of output datagrams that this entity received and forwarded to

their final destinations. In entities that do not act as IPv6 routers, this

counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this

entity, and the source-route processing was successful. For a successfully

forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented.

Table 51. IPv6 Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Routing User Manual189

If the address exists, the entry is displayed.

7. To clear the IPv6 neighbors for all interfaces, click the Clear button.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 52. IPv6 Neighbor Table information

Field Description

Interface The interface whose settings are displayed in the current table row.

IPv6 Address The IPv6 address of the neighbor or interface.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with an interface.

isRtr Indicates whether the neighbor is a router. If the neighbor is a router, the value is True. If

the neighbor is not a router, the value is False.

Neighbor State The state of the neighbor cache entry. Following are the states for dynamic entries in the

IPv6 neighbor discovery cache:

• Incomplete. Address resolution is being performed on the entry. A neighbor

solicitation message was sent to the solicited-node multicast address of the target,

but the corresponding neighbor advertisement message is not yet received.

• Reachable. Positive confirmation was received within the last Reachable Time

milliseconds that the forward path to the neighbor was functioning properly. While in

REACH state, the device takes no special action as packets are sent.

• Stale. More than Reachable Time milliseconds elapsed since the last positive

confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly. While in

STALE state, the device takes no action until a packet is sent.

• Delay. More than Reachable Time milliseconds elapsed since the last positive

confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly. A packet

was sent within the last DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds. If no reachability

confirmation is received within DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds of entering

the DELAY state, send a neighbor solicitation message and change the state to

PROBE.

• Probe. Seeks a reachability confirmation by resending neighbor solicitation

messages every Retrans Timer milliseconds until a reachability confirmation is

received.

Last Updated Time since the address was confirmed to be reachable.

190

5Configure Quality of Service

In a switch, each physical port consists of one or more queues for transmitting packets on the

attached network. Multiple queues per port are often provided to give preference to certain

packets over others based on user-defined criteria. When a packet is queued for transmission in

a port, the rate at which it is serviced depends on how the queue is configured and possibly the

amount of traffic present in the other queues of the port. If a delay is necessary, packets get held

in the queue until the scheduler authorizes the queue for transmission. As queues become full,

packets can no longer be held for transmission and are dropped by the switch.

Quality of Service (QoS) is a means of providing consistent, predictable data delivery by

distinguishing packets with strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of delay.

Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS-capable network.

With this in mind, all elements of the network must be QoS capable. The presence of at least one

node that is not QoS capable creates a deficiency in the network path, and the performance of

the entire packet flow is compromised.

This chapter covers the following topics:

•Manage Class of Service

•Manage Differentiated Services

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual191

Manage Class of Service

The Class of Service (CoS) queueing feature lets you directly configure certain aspects of

switch queueing. This provides the desired QoS behavior for different types of network traffic

when the complexities of DiffServ are not required. The priority of a packet arriving at an

interface can be used to steer the packet to the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a

mapping table. CoS queue characteristics that affect queue mapping, such as minimum

guaranteed bandwidth or transmission rate shaping, are user configurable at the queue (or

port) level.

Eight queues per port are supported.

From the QoS > CoS > Advanced menu, you can access pages that are described in the

following sections:

•CoS Configuration on page 191

•Configure Global CoS Settings on page 192

•Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface on page 192

•Configure the Global CoS Queue Settings on page 194

•Configure the Global 802.1p to Queue Mapping on page 195

•DSCP to Queue Mapping on page 196

CoS Configuration

Use the CoS Configuration page to set the class of service trust mode of an interface. Each

port in the switch can be configured to trust one of the packet fields (802.1p or IP DSCP), or

to not trust any packet’s priority designation (untrusted mode). If the port is set to a trusted

mode, it uses a mapping table appropriate for the trusted field being used. This mapping

table indicates the CoS queue to which the packet must be forwarded on the appropriate

egress port. Of course, the trusted field must exist in the packet for the mapping table to be of

any use. If this is not the case, default actions are performed. These actions involve directing

the packet to a specific CoS level configured for the ingress port as a whole, based on the

existing port default priority as mapped to a traffic class by the current 802.1p mapping table.

Alternatively, when a port is configured as untrusted, it does not trust any incoming packet

priority designation and uses the port default priority value instead. All packets arriving at the

ingress of an untrusted port are directed to a specific CoS queue on the appropriate egress

ports, in accordance with the configured default priority of the ingress port. This process is

also used for cases where a trusted port mapping cannot be honored, such as when a non-IP

packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP DSCP value.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual192

Configure Global CoS Settings

To configure CoS trust mode settings on all interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS> CoS > Basic > CoS Configuration.

The CoS Configuration page displays.

6. From the Global Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode options for

ingress traffic on the switch:

• Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

• 802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7. This

QoS setting lets you map traffic with one of eight priority levels to one of eight internal

hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.

• DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the Differentiated

Services Code Point (DSCP) bits. This QoS setting lets you map traffic with particular

DSCP bits to one of multiple queues.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface

Use the CoS Interface Configuration page to configure the interface shaping rate and

interface ingress rate limit to one or more interfaces.

To configure CoS settings for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual193

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > CoS Interface Configuration.

The CoS Interface Configuration page displays.

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

The Interface Trust Mode column display the globally configured trust mode (see

Configure Global CoS Settings on page 192). This mode is the same for all interfaces.

8. The Interface Trust Mode field displays whether the selected interfaces trust a particular

packet marking when the packet enters the port. The data for all the ports is taken from the

Global Trust Mode. To set this for a specific port, select one of the following values:

• Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

• 802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7. The

QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of four internal

hardware priority queues.This is the default setting.

• DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the Differentiated

Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

9. In the Interface Shaping Rate field, specify the maximum bandwidth allowed.

This specification is typically used to shape the outbound transmission rate in this range

of 64–10000000 Kbps. The shaping rate (Kb) value is the value of the interface shaping

rate configured. The default value is 0. The value 0 means that the maximum is unlimited.

10. In the Interface Ingress Rate Limit field, specify the ingress rate allowed.

The range is 100 to 10000000 Kbps. The default value is 0. The value 0 means that the

maximum is unlimited.

11. Click the Apply button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual194

Your settings are saved.

Configure the Global CoS Queue Settings

Use the Queue Configuration page to define what a particular queue does by configuring

switch egress queues. You can control the amount of bandwidth that is used by the queue

and the scheduling of packet transmission from the set of all queues on a port.

You can configure eight queues as strict priority, weighted round robin (WRR) priority, or a

combination of both. If a specific queue is configured as WRR, all the queues with a lower

number are also WRR queues.

The configuration process is simplified by allowing each CoS queue parameter to be

configured globally. A global configuration change is automatically applied to all ports.

To configure the global CoS queue settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > Interface Queue Configuration.

6. Select the check box for the queue that you want to configure.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual195

You can select more than one check box or you can select the check box in the table

heading to configure all queues in the same way.

7. In the Minimum Bandwidth field, specify the minimum guaranteed bandwidth allotted to the

queue.

Enter a value in the range of 1 to 100 that reflects the relative bandwidth of this queue.

The bandwidth allocation per queue is the configured weight divided by the sum of all the

configured weights. The sum of the minimum bandwidths for all queues does not need to

equal 100.

This setting is configurable and applicable only if the selection from the Scheduler Type

menu is Weighted.

8. From the Scheduler Type menu, select one of the following options:

• Weighted. Weighted round robin (WRR) associates a weight to each queue. This is

the default setting.

• Strict. Strict lets the switch service traffic with the highest priority on a queue first.

The Queue Management Type field displays the queue depth management technique

that is used for queues on the interface. By default, this method is Taildrop, irrespective of

your selection from the Scheduler Type menu. All packets on a queue are normally

processed unless congestion occurs. If congestion occurs, any additional packets that

are queued are dropped.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the Global 802.1p to Queue Mapping

You can view or change which internal traffic classes are mapped to the 802.1p priority class

values in Ethernet frames that the switch receives. The priority-to-traffic class mappings can

be applied globally only. The mapping allows the switch to group various traffic types (for

example, data or voice) based on their latency requirements and give preference to

time-sensitive traffic.

To map 802.1p priorities to queues:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual196

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > 802.1p to Queue Mapping.

6. In the 802.1p to Queue Mapping table, map each of the eight 802.1p priorities to a queue

(internal traffic class).

The 802.1p Priority row contains traffic class selectors for each of the eight 802.1p

priorities to be mapped. The priority goes from low (0) to high (7). For example, traffic with

a priority of 0 is for most data traffic and is sent using best effort. Traffic with a higher

priority, such as 7, might be time-sensitive traffic, such as voice or video.

The values in the menu under each priority represent the traffic class. The traffic class is

the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue

position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in higher queues to

be sent.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

DSCP to Queue Mapping

Use the DSCP to Queue Mapping page to map an internal traffic class to a DSCP value.

The allowed Per Hop Behavior (PHBs) values, apart from other DSCP experimental values,

are as follows:

• Class Selector (CS) PHB. These values are based on IP precedence.

• Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB. These values are used to define four main levels that

allow the switch to sort and manipulate certain flows within the network.

• Expedited Forwarding (EF) PHB. These values are used to prioritize traffic for real-time

applications. In many situations, if the network must handle excess traffic and an

application requires a bandwidth guarantee, the EF traffic must receive this rate

independently of other traffic that attempts to transit the switch.

• Other DSCP Values (Local/Experimental Use). These are less common values.

To map DSCP values to queues:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual197

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > DSCP to Queue Mapping.

The previous figure does not show the Expedited Forwarding (EF) PHB values and the

Other DSCP Values (Local/Experimental Use) values.

6. For each DSCP value, select from the corresponding Queue menu which internal traffic

class must be mapped to the DSCP value.

The traffic class is the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a

higher queue position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in

higher queues to be sent.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage Differentiated Services

The QoS feature contains Differentiated Services (DiffServ) support that allows traffic to be

classified into streams and given certain QoS treatment in accordance with defined per-hop

behaviors.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual198

Standard IP-based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service. Best

effort service implies that the network attempts to deliver the data in a timely fashion. During

times of congestion, packets might be delayed, sent sporadically, or dropped. For typical

Internet applications, such as email and file transfer, a slight degradation in service is

acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable. Conversely, any degradation of service can

negatively affect applications with strict timing requirements, such as voice or multimedia.

From the QoS > Diffserv > Advanced menu, you can access pages that are described in the

following sections:

•DiffServ Overview on page 198

•View the Global DiffServ Resources on page 199

•Specify DSCP Remark Values for Violate Action IP Packets on page 199

•Configure IPv4 DiffServ Classes on page 201

•Configure an IPv6 DiffServ IPv6 Classes on page 205

•Configure a DiffServ Policy on page 209

•Configure DiffServ Service Interfaces on page 214

•View DiffServ Service Statistics on page 215

DiffServ Overview

To use DiffServ for QoS, you must first define the following categories and their criteria:

1. Class. Create classes and define class criteria.

2. Policy. Create policies, associate classes with policies, and define policy statements.

3. Service. Add a policy to an inbound interface.

Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria. The classification criteria are

defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy’s attributes. Policy attributes can be

defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match

occurs. A policy can contain multiples classes. When the policy is active, the actions taken

depend on which class matches the packet.

The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class. Then

one or more classes are added to a policy. Policies are then added to interfaces.

Packet processing begins by testing the class match criteria for a packet.

The All class type option specifies that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to

true for a packet to match that class. Classes are tested in the order in which they were

added to the policy.

A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual199

View the Global DiffServ Resources

By default, the DiffServ administrative mode is enabled. (You cannot manually disable it.) You

can view the used DiffServ resources.

To view the global DiffServ resources:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Basic > DiffServ Configuration.

The Diffserv Configuration page displays.

The Diffserv Used Resources field displays the number of configured DiffServ classes on

the switch. The maximum number of available system resources, including DiffServ

classes, is 2048. For more information about system resources, see View the System

Resource Utilization on page 311.

6. Click the Refresh button to refresh the page with the latest information about the switch.

Specify DSCP Remark Values for Violate Action IP Packets

If you assign a policer to a class map (which represents a traffic flow), you can specify the

action that must be taken when the amount of traffic in the flow exceeds the specified limits.

This action is referred to as the violate action and applies to the portion of the traffic that

causes the flow to exceed its QoS limit. That portion of the traffic is referred to as the violate

action IP packets.

When this action occurs, the switch remaps the original DSCP value of the violate action IP

packets with a new value based on the information in the DSCP Violate Action Mapping

table. The switch uses the new values to assign resources and the egress queues to these

packets. The switch also physically replaces the original DSCP value in the violate action

packets with the new DSCP value.

This feature changes (remarks) the DSCP tags for incoming traffic switched between trusted

QoS domains.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual200

For example, assume three levels of service—A, B, and C—and that the DSCP incoming

values used to mark these levels are 10, 20, and 30 respectively. If this traffic is forwarded to

another service provider that provides the same three levels of service, but uses DSCP

values 16, 24, and 48, the DSCP violate action mapping changes the incoming values as

they are mapped to the outgoing values.

To specify the DSCP remark values for violate action IP packets:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Basic > DSCP Violate Action Mapping.

The previous figure does not show the Expedited Forwarding (EF) PHB values and the

Other DSCP Values (Local/Experimental Use) values.

6. For each DSCP value, from the corresponding DSCP Out menu, select to which internal

traffic class the DSCP value must be remarked.

The original DSCP value for the incoming traffic is shown in the DSCP In field.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual201

Configure IPv4 DiffServ Classes

You can add a DiffServ class and define the criteria that are associated with a DiffServ class.

As packets are received, these DiffServ classes are used to prioritize packets. You can set up

multiple match criteria in a class. The logic is a Boolean logical AND for this criteria.

After creating a class, click the class link to the Class page as described in the following

procedure.

Add and Configure an IPv4 DiffServ Class

To add and configure an IPv4 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Configuration page displays.

6. In the Class Name field, enter a class name.

The Class Name field also lists all the existing IPv4 DiffServ class names, from which one

can be selected for modification or deletion.

7. From the Class Type menu, select the class type All.

The switch supports only the class type value All, which means that all the various match

criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND

statement of all the match criteria.

8. Click the Add button.

The new class is added.

9. After creating the class, click the class name.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual202

The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class

configuration.

The class name and class type are stated in the Class Configuration section at the top of

the page. These fields are nonconfigurable on this page.

10. Select one of the following Class Definition radio buttons:

• Existing ACL. From the menu, select an existing ACL for traffic classification. For

information about creating ACLs, see Configure Access Control Lists on page 259. If

you select this radio button, the fields on the page are disabled and you cannot define

classification rules.

• Class Specific Rule. Use class-specific rules. If you select this radio button (which is

selected by default), the fields on the page are enabled so that you can define

classification rules. See the next step.

11. If you select the Class Specific Rule radio button, define the criteria that must be

associated with the DiffServ class:

• Match Every. Select this check box to add a match condition that considers all

packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the Match Every menu is Any.

If you select the Match Every check box, you cannot define any other options.

• Class of Service. Select this check box to require the Class of Service (CoS) value in

an Ethernet frame header to match the specified CoS value. This option lists all the

values for the Class of Service match criterion in the range 0 to 7 from which one can

be selected.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual203

• VLAN. Select this check box to require a packet’s VLAN ID to match a VLAN ID or a

VLAN ID within a continuous range. If you configure a range, a match occurs if a

packet’s VLAN ID is the same as any VLAN ID within the range. The VLAN value is in

the range of 0–4093.

• Ethernet Type. Select this check box to require the EtherType value in the Ethernet

frame header to match the specified EtherType value. After you select the check box,

select the EtherType keyword from the menu of common protocols that are mapped

to their Ethertype value. If you select User Value from the menu, you can enter a

value in the field next to the menu.

• Source MAC. Select this check box to require a packet’s source MAC address to

match the specified MAC address. After you select this check box, use the following

fields to configure the source MAC address match criteria:

- Address. The source MAC address to match.

- Mask. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the source MAC address to

compare against the Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC

mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that

the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff,

and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result

in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard

mask, which ACLs use.

• Destination MAC. Select this check box to require a packet’s destination MAC

address to match the specified MAC address. After you select the check box, use the

following fields to configure the destination MAC address match criteria:

- Address. The destination MAC address to match.

- Mask. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the destination MAC address to

compare against an Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC

mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that

the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff,

and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result

in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard

mask, which ACLs use.

• Protocol Type. Select this check box to require a packet’s Layer 4 protocol to match

the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. If you select Other from

the menu, you can enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.

• Source IP. Select this check box to require a packet’s source IP address to match the

specified IP address. After you select the check box, use the following fields to

configure the source IP address match criteria:

- Address. The source IP address format to match in dotted-decimal format.

- Mask. The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the

source IP address to use for matching against packet content.

• Source L4 Port. Select this check box to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to

match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. If you select

Other from the menu, you can enter a source port number.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual204

• Destination IP. Select this check box to require a packet’s destination IP address to

match the specified IP address. After you select the check box, use the following

fields to configure the destination IP address match criteria:

- Address. The destination IP address format to match in dotted-decimal format.

- Mask. The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the

destination IP address to use for matching against packet content.

• Destination L4 Port. Select this check box to require a packet’s TCP/UDP destination

port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. If you

select Other from the menu, you can enter a destination port number.

• Service Type. Select this check box either to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code

Point (DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code or to require the

packet’s IP precedence value to match the specified number from 0 to 7:

- IP DSCP. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point

(DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must

select from the menu. If you select Other from the menu, you can enter an IP

DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of

the Service Type octet in the IP header.

- Precedence Value. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP precedence

value to match the specified number from 0 to 7, which you must select from the

menu. The IP Precedence field in a packet is defined as the high-order 3 bits of

the Service Type octet in the IP header.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the Criteria for an Existing IPv4 DiffServ Class

To change the criteria for an existing IPv4 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Configuration page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual205

6. Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.

7. Change the class configuration as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an IPv4 DiffServ Class

To delete an IPv4 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the class name.

7. Click the Delete button.

The class is removed.

Configure an IPv6 DiffServ IPv6 Classes

The IPv6 class configuration feature extends the existing QoS ACL and DiffServ functionality

by providing support for IPv6 packet classification. An Ethernet IPv6 packet is distinguished

from an IPv4 packet by its unique Ethertype value, so all IPv6 classifiers include the

Ethertype field. An IPv6 access list serves the same purpose as its IPv4 counterpart.

The destination and source IPv6 addresses use a prefix length value instead of an individual

mask to qualify them as a subnet addresses or a host addresses. The flow label is a 20-bit

number that is unique to an IPv6 packet, used by end stations to signify some form of Quality

of Service (QoS) handling in routers.

Packets that match an IPv6 classifier are allowed to be marked using only the 802.1p (CoS)

field or the IP DSCP field in the Traffic Class octet. IP precedence is not defined for IPv6.

This is not an appropriate type of packet marking.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual206

IPv6 ACL/DiffServ assignment is appropriate for LAG interfaces. The procedures described

by an ACL or DiffServ policy are equally applicable on a LAG interface.

Add and Configure an IPv6 DiffServ Class

To add and configure an IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The IPv6 Class Name a page displays.

6. In the Class Name field, enter a class name.

The Class Name field also lists all the existing IPv6 DiffServ class names, from which one

can be selected for modification or deletion.

7. From the Class Type menu, select the class type All.

The switch supports only the class type value All, which means that all the various match

criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND

statement of all the match criteria.

8. Click the Add button.

The new class is added.

9. After creating the class, click the class name.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual207

The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class

configuration.

The class name and class type are stated in the IPv6 Class Configuration section at the

top of the page. These fields are nonconfigurable on this page.

10. Select one of the following Class Definition radio buttons:

• Existing ACL. From the menu, select an existing ACL for traffic classification. For

information about creating ACLs, see Configure Access Control Lists on page 259. If

you select this radio button, the fields on the page are disabled and you cannot define

classification rules.

• Class Specific Rule. Use class-specific rules. If you select this radio button (which is

selected by default), the fields on the page are enabled so that you can define

classification rules. See the next step.

11. If you select the Class Specific Rule radio button, define the criteria that must be

associated with the IPv6 DiffServ class:

• Match Every. Select this check box to add a match condition that considers all

packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the Match Every menu is Any.

Note: If you select the Match Every check box, you cannot define any other

options.

• Protocol Type. Select this check box to require a packet’s Layer 4 protocol to match

the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. If you select Other from

the menu, you can enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.

• Source Prefix/Length. Select this check box to require a packet’s source prefix and

prefix length to match the specified source IPv6 prefix and prefix length. The prefix

must always be specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be in the hexadecimal

range from 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and the prefix

length can be in the range from 0 to 128.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual208

• Source L4 Port. Select this check box to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to

match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. If you select

Other from the menu, you can enter a source port number.

• Destination Prefix/Length. Select this check box to require a packet’s destination

prefix and prefix length to match the specified source IPv6 prefix and prefix length.

The prefix must always be specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be in the

hexadecimal range from 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and

the prefix length can be in the range from 0 to 128.

• Destination L4 Port. Select this check box to require a packet’s TCP/UDP destination

port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. If you

select Other from the menu, you can enter a destination port number.

• IP DSCP. Select this check box to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point (DSCP)

value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must select from the

menu. If you select Other from the menu, you can enter an IP DSCP value from 0 to

63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the Service Type octet in

the IP header.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the Criteria for an Existing IPv6 DiffServ Class

To change the criteria for an existing IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The IPv6 Class Name page displays.

6. Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.

7. Change the class configuration as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual209

Your settings are saved.

Delete an IPv6 DiffServ Class

To delete an IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The IPv6 Class Name page displays.

6. Select the check box for the class name.

7. Click the Delete button.

The class is removed.

Configure a DiffServ Policy

Use the Policy Configuration page to associate a collection of classes with one or more

policies.

Add and Configure a DiffServ Policy

To add and configure a DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual210

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Enter a policy name in the Policy Name field.

You cannot specify the policy type. By default, the policy type is In, indicating that the

policy applies to ingress packets.

7. From the Member Class menu, optionally select an existing class that you want to

associate with the new policy.

8. Click the Add button.

The new policy is added.

9. After creating the policy, click the policy name.

The policy name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the policy attributes.

Note: The hyperlink is available only if the class associated with the policy

was configured using class-specific rules. If the class was configured

using an existing ACL, the hyperlink is not available because only the

ACL rules of permit or deny apply and policy attributes are not

applicable.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual211

The policy name, policy type, and member class name are stated in the Class Information

section at the top of the page. These fields are nonconfigurable on this page.

10. From the Assign Queue menu, select the queue to which packets of this policy class must

be assigned.

This is a value in the range from 0 to 7.

11. Configure the policy attributes:

• Drop. Select this radio button to require each inbound packet to be dropped.

• Mark VLAN CoS. Select this radio button to specify the VLAN priority, which you must

select from the menu. The VLAN priority is expressed as an integer value in the range

from 0 to 7.

• Mark IP DSCP. Select this radio button to require packets to be marked with an IP

DSCP keyword code, which you must select from the menu. If you select Other from

the menu, you can enter an IP DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined

as the high-order 6 bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header.

• Simple Policy. Select this radio button to define the traffic policing style for the class.

A simple policy uses a single data rate and burst size, resulting in one of two

outcomes: conform or violate. You must define the policy as described in the next

step.

12. If you select the Simple Policy radio button, you can specify the traffic policing style for the

class:

• Color Mode. The default color mode is Color Blind. Color classes do not apply.

• Committed Rate. Enter the committed rate that is applied to conforming packets by

specifying a value in the range from 1 to 4294967295 Kbps.

• Committed Burst Size. Enter the committed burst size that is applied to conforming

packets by specifying an integer from 3000 to 19173960. The committed burst size is

the maximum amount of traffic that is allowed in one burst (in bytes).

Note: The switch uses the token bucket algorithm, in which the committed

rate is the rate at which the bucket is filled, and the committed burst

size is the size of the bucket. This means that the committed burst size

is the maximum size of a burst that the switch can send.

13. If you select the Simple Policy radio button, you can select the conforming and violating

actions.

The Conform Action section and Violate Action section list the actions to be taken on

conforming packets according to the policing metrics. By default, both conforming

packets and violating packets are sent.

In both the Conform Action section and the Violate Action section, select one of the

following actions:

• Send. Packets are forwarded unmodified. This is the default conforming action and

the default violating action.

• Drop. Packets are dropped. This action can apply to a conforming action and to a

violating action.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual212

• Mark CoS. Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value before being

forwarded. This selection requires that the Mark CoS field is set. You must select a

CoS value from 0 to 7 from the menu.

This action can apply only to a conforming action.

• Mark IP DSCP. Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP value before

being forwarded. This selection requires that the DSCP field is set. You must select a

DSCP code from the menu. If you select Other from the menu, you can enter an IP

DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header.

This action can apply only to a conforming action.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the Policy Attributes for an Existing DiffServ Policy

To change the policy attributes for an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Click the policy name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the policy attributes displays.

7. Change the policy attributes as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual213

Assign Another Class to an Existing DiffServ Policy

To assign another class to an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the policy name.

7. From the Member Class menu, select another class.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete a DiffServ Policy

To delete a DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual214

6. Select the check box for the policy name.

7. Click the Delete button.

The policy is removed.

Configure DiffServ Service Interfaces

You can assign a policy to one or more interfaces.

Attach a DiffServ Policy to an Interface

To attach a DiffServ policy to an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

The Service Configuration page displays.

6. Select which type of interfaces display onscreen:

•To display physical ports only, click the PORTS link.

•To display LAGs only, click the LAGS link.

•To display both physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Policy Name menu, select a policy name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual215

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Remove a DiffServ Policy From an Interface

To remove a DiffServ policy from an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

The Service Interface Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check boxes that are associated with the interfaces from which you want to

remove the policy.

7. From the Policy In Name menu, select None.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View DiffServ Service Statistics

You can display service-level statistical information about all interfaces to which DiffServ

policies are attached.

To view the DiffServ service statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

Table 53. Service Interface Configuration information

Field Description

Direction Shows that the traffic direction of this service interface is In.

Operational Status Shows the operational status of this service interface, which is always Up.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual216

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Statistics.

The Service Statistics page displays.

6. Click the Refresh button to refresh the page with the latest information about the switch.

The following table describes the information available on the Service Statistics page.

Table 54. DiffServ Service Statistics information

Field Description

Interface List of all valid slot number and port number combinations on the switch with a DiffServ

policy currently attached in the inbound direction.

Direction List of the traffic direction of interface as In. Shows only the directions for which a DiffServ

policy is currently attached.

Policy Name Name of the policy currently attached to the specified interface and direction.

Operational Status Shows the operational status of this service interface, which is always Up.

Member Classes All DiffServ classes currently defined as members of the selected policy name.

217

6Manage Device Security

This chapter covers the following topics:

•Management Security Settings

•Configure Management Access

•Configure Port Authentication

•Set Up Traffic Control

•Configure Access Control Lists

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual218

Management Security Settings

From the Management Security menu, you can access the pages that are described in the

following sections:

•Change the Password on page 218

•Reset the Password to the Factory Default Value on page 219

•Configure RADIUS Servers on page 220

•Configure TACACS+ Servers on page 226

•Configure Authentication Lists on page 229

Change the Password

You can change the login password that is required for access to the switch.

To change the login password for the web-based management interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security> Management Security > User Configuration > Change Password.

The Change Password page displays.

6. In the Old Password field, specify the current password for the account created by the user.

The entered password is displayed in dots. Passwords are up to 20 alphanumeric

characters in length, and are case sensitive.

7. In the New Password field, specify the optional new or changed password for the account.

The entered password is displayed in dots. Passwords are up to 20 alphanumeric

characters in length, and are case sensitive.

8. In the Confirm Password field, enter the password again to confirm that you entered it

correctly.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual219

The entered password is displayed in dots.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Reset the Password to the Factory Default Value

You can reset the login password that is required for access to the switch to the factory

default value.

To reset the login password for the web-based management interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security> Management Security > User Configuration > Change Password.

The Change Password page displays.

6. Select the Reset Password check box.

7. Click the Apply button.

The password is reset to the default password, which is password.

Note: If you forget the password and are unable to log in to the switch

management interface, press the Factory Defaults button on the

front panel of the switch for more than two seconds. The device

reboots, and all switch settings, including the password, are reset to

the factory default values. (The Reset button only reboots the switch.)

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual220

Configure RADIUS Servers

Remote Authorization Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers provide additional security for

networks. The RADIUS server maintains a user database, which contains per-user

authentication information. The switch passes information to the configured RADIUS server,

which can authenticate a user name and password before authorizing use of the network.

RADIUS servers provide a centralized authentication method for the following:

•Web access

•Access control port (802.1X)

From the Security > Management Security > RADIUS menu, you can access the pages

that are described in the following sections:

•Configure the Global RADIUS Server Settings on page 220

•Configure a RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch on page 222

•Add a Primary or Secondary RADIUS Authentication Server to the Switch on page 222

•Modify the Settings for a RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch on page 223

•Remove a RADIUS Authentication Server From the Switch on page 223

•Configure a RADIUS Accounting Server on page 224

•Add a RADIUS Accounting Server to the Switch on page 224

•Modify the Settings for a RADIUS Accounting Server on the Switch on page 225

•Remove a RADIUS Accounting Server From the Switch on page 225

Configure the Global RADIUS Server Settings

Use the Global Configuration page to add information about one or more RADIUS servers on

the network.

Consider the maximum delay time when you are configuring RADIUS maximum retransmit

and RADIUS time-out values. If multiple RADIUS servers are configured, the maximum

retransmit period on each server runs out before the next server is attempted. A retransmit

does not occur until the configured time-out period on that server passes without a response

from the RADIUS server. Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving a response from the

RADIUS application equals the retransmit time x time-out period for all configured servers. If

the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt, all user interfaces are blocked

until the RADIUS application returns a response.

To configure the global RADIUS server settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual221

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Global Configuration.

The RADIUS Configuration page displays.

The Current Server IP Address field is blank if no servers are configured (see Configure

a RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch on page 222). The switch supports up to

eight RADIUS servers. If more than one RADIUS server is configured, the current server

is the server configured as the primary server. If no servers are configured as the primary

server, the current server is the most recently added RADIUS server.

6. In the Max Number of Retransmits field, specify the maximum number of times a request

packet is retransmitted to the RADIUS server.

The valid range is from 1 to 15. The default value is 3.

Consider the maximum delay time when you are configuring RADIUS maximum

retransmit and RADIUS time-out values. See the information in the introduction of this

section.

7. In the Timeout Duration field, specify the time-out value, in seconds, for request

retransmissions.

The valid range is from 1 to 30. The default value is 3.

Consider the maximum delay time when you are configuring RADIUS maximum

retransmit and RADIUS time-out values. See the information in the introduction of this

section.

8. From he Accounting Mode menu, select to disable or enable RADIUS accounting on the

server.

The default is Disabled.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields displayed on the page.

Table 55. RADIUS Configuration information

Field Description

Current Server Address The address of the current server. This field is blank if no servers are

configured.

Number of Configuration Servers The number of configured RADIUS servers. The value can range from 0 to 8.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual222

Configure a RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch

Use the RADIUS Server Configuration page to view and configure various settings for a

RADIUS server configured on the switch.

Add a Primary or Secondary RADIUS Authentication Server to the Switch

To add a primary or secondary RADIUS authentication server to the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

The Server Configuration page displays.

6. In the Server Address field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS server.

7. In the Authentication Port field, specify the UDP port number the server uses to verify the

RADIUS server authentication.

The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is 1812.

8. From the Secret Configured menu, select Yes.

You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the

RADIUS server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server was

configured.

9. In the Secret field, type the shared secret text string used for authenticating and encrypting

all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS server.

This secret must match the RADIUS encryption.

10. From the Active menu, select Primary for a primary authentication server or Secondary for

a secondary authentication server.

11. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the switch.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual223

Modify the Settings for a RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch

To modify the settings for a RADIUS authentication server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

The Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the server.

7. Modify the configuration for the selected server.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a RADIUS Authentication Server From the Switch

To a remove a RADIUS authentication server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

The Server Configuration page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual224

6. Select the check box for the server.

7. Click the Delete button.

The RADIUS server is removed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a RADIUS Accounting Server

You can configure various settings for a single RADIUS accounting server on the network.

RADIUS accounting is supported for both AAA and 802.1x sessions.

Add a RADIUS Accounting Server to the Switch

To add a RADIUS accounting server to the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.

6. In the Accounting Server Address field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS accounting

server.

7. In the Port field, specify the UDP port number the server uses to verify the RADIUS

accounting server authentication.

The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is 1813.

8. From the Secret Configured menu, select Yes to add a RADIUS secret in the next field.

You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the

RADIUS accounting server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server

was configured.

9. In the Secret field, type the shared secret to use with the specified accounting server.

10. From the Accounting Mode menu, select Enable to enable the RADIUS accounting mode.

11. Click the Add button.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual225

The server is added to the switch.

Modify the Settings for a RADIUS Accounting Server on the Switch

To modify the settings for a RADIUS accounting server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.

6. Modify the configuration for the selected accounting server.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a RADIUS Accounting Server From the Switch

To a remove a RADIUS accounting server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual226

6. Click the Delete button.

All fields are set to their defaults.

Configure TACACS+ Servers

TACACS+ provides a centralized user management system, while still retaining consistency

with RADIUS and other authentication processes. TACACS+ provides the following services:

• Authentication. Provides authentication during login and through user names and

user-defined passwords.

• Authorization. Performed at login. When the authentication session is completed, an

authorization session starts using the authenticated user name. The TACACS+ server

checks the user privileges.

The TACACS+ protocol ensures network security through encrypted protocol exchanges

between the device and TACACS+ server.

From the Security > Management Security > TACACS+ menu, you can access the pages

that are described in the following sections:

•Configure the Global TACACS+ Settings on page 226

•Configure a TACACS+ Server on the Switch on page 227

•Modify the Settings for a TACACS+ Server on the Switch on page 228

•Remove a TACACS+ Server From the Switch on page 228

Configure the Global TACACS+ Settings

The TACACS+ Configuration page contains the TACACS+ settings for communication

between the switch and the TACACS+ servers that you configure.

To configure the global TACACS+ settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > TACACS+ > TACACS+ Configuration.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual227

The ACACS+ Configuration page displays.

6. In the Key String field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+

communications between the switch and the TACACS+ server.

The valid range is 0–128. The key must match the key configured on the TACACS+

server.

7. In the Connection Timeout field, specify the maximum number of seconds allowed to

establish a TCP connection between the switch and the TACACS+ server.

The range is 1–30 seconds. If you do not specify a value, the switch uses a default value

of 5 seconds.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a TACACS+ Server on the Switch

Use the TACACS+ Server Configuration page to configure up to five TACACS+ servers with

which the switch can communicate.

To configure a TACACS+ server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.

6. In the TACACS+ Server field, enter the TACACS+ server IP address.

7. In the Priority field, specify the priority for the TACACS+ server.

The priority determines the order in which the TACACS+ servers are contacted when

attempting to authenticate a user. A value of 0 is the highest priority. The valid range is

0–65535.

8. In the Port field, specify the authentication port value for TACAS+ server sessions. It must

be within the range 0–65535. If you do not specify a value, the switch uses the standard

TCP port 49 for sessions with the server.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual228

9. In the Key String field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+

communications between the device and the TACACS+ server.

The valid range is 0–128. The key must match the key used on the TACACS+ server.

10. In the Connection Timeout field, specify the time that passes before the connection

between the device and the TACACS+ server times out.

The range is 1–30 seconds. If you do not specify a value, the switch uses a default value

of 5 seconds.

11. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the switch.

Modify the Settings for a TACACS+ Server on the Switch

To modify the settings for a TACACS+ server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the server.

7. Modify the configuration for the selected accounting server.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a TACACS+ Server From the Switch

To a remove a TACACS+ server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual229

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the server.

7. Click the Delete button.

The RADIUS accounting server is removed.

Configure Authentication Lists

Use the Authentication List page to configure the default login list. A login list specifies one or

more authentication methods to validate switch or port access for the admin user.

Note: The admin user is assigned to a preconfigured list that is named

defaultList and that you cannot delete.

From the Security > Management Security > Authentication List menu, you can access

the pages that are described in the following sections:

•Configure an HTTP Authentication List on page 229

•Configure an HTTPS Authentication List on page 231

Configure an HTTP Authentication List

Use the HTTP Authentication List page to configure the default HTTP login list.

To change the HTTP authentication method for the default list:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual230

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > Authentication List > HTTP Authentication

List.

The HTTP Authentication List page displays.

6. Select the check box for the httpList name.

7. From the menu in the 1 column, select the authentication method that must be used first in

the selected authentication login list.

If you select a method that does not time out as the first method, such as Local or None,

you cannot configure a second and third method. If you configure another method and

then select Local or None as the first method, no other method is tried. User

authentication occurs in the order that the methods are selected. Possible methods are

as follows:

• Local. The user’s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication. This is

the default method. Because the local method does not time out, if you select this

option as the first method, no other method is tried, even if you specified more than

one method.

• RADIUS. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the RADIUS server. If

you select Radius or Tacacs as the first method and an error occurs during the

authentication, the switch uses method 2 to authenticate the user.

• TACACS+. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the TACACS+

server. If you select Radius or Tacacs as the first method and an error occurs during

the authentication, the switch attempts user authentication method 2.

• None. The authentication method is unspecified. If you select this option as the first

method, no other method is tried, even if you specified more than one method.

8. From the menu in the 2 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used

second in the selected authentication login list.

This is the method that is used if the first method times out. If you select a method that

does not time out as the second method, the third method is not tried.

9. From the menu in the 3 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used

third in the selected authentication login list.

10. From the menu in the 4 column, select the method, if any, that must be used fourth in the

selected authentication login list.

This is the method that is used if all previous methods time out.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Smart Managed Pro Switches MS510TX and MS510TXPP

Manage Device Security User Manual231

Configure an HTTPS Authentication List

Use the HTTPS Authentication List to configure the default login list for secure HTTP

(HTTPS).

To configure an HTTPS authentication list:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the Switch on page 14.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > Authentication List > HTTPS Authentication

List.

The HTTPS Authentication List page displays.

6. Select the check box for the httpsList name.

7. From the menu in the 1 column, select the authentication method that must be used first in

the selected authentication login list.

If you select a method that does not time out as the first method, such as Local or None,

you cannot configure a second and third method. If you configure another method and

then select Local or None as the first method, no other method is tried. User

authentication occurs in the order that the methods are selected. Possible methods are

as follows:

• Local. The user’s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication. This is

the default method. Because the Local method does not time out, if you select this